of 544 /544
52708-010000-1710A January 23, 2004 Autodesk Inventor 8 Official Training Courseware Essentials ®

Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

  • Upload
    sandu53

  • View
    651

  • Download
    5

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

52708-010000-1710A January 23, 2004

Autodesk Inventor 8

Official Training Courseware

Essentials

®

Page 2: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc.All Rights Reserved

This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.

AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, ANDMAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.

IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THESOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THEPURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.

Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this productat the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk TrademarksThe following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D StudioMAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro,Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), AutodeskMapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped,bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion,Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop,Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered withAutodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION*, Visual,Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat,Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo).

The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop,AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQLInterface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com,Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter,Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending theDesign Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onaironline, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, andWhere Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. TrademarksThe following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire,flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire.

The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party TrademarksAll other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program CreditsACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc.

Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.

InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.

PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc., trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.

Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.

Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992.

Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USEUse, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial ComputerSoftware-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Page 3: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials
Page 4: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Page 5: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Starting an Autodesk Inventor Design Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Autodesk Inventor Workflow Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Autodesk Inventor Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Part Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Assembly Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Presentation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Using Templates Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Projects in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Project Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Project Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Creating Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Editing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41The Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42The Panel Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513D Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Exercise: The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54How To Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55What's New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Visual Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Help For AutoCAD Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Autodesk Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Sketch Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Sketch Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

iCopyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 6: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Rules for Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Sketch Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Precise Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Editing Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Sketch Doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Exercise: Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Constraining Sketches in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Planning Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Showing and Deleting Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Show All Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Use Construction Geometry in the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Exercise: Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Parametric Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Additional Options for Applying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Automatic Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Displaying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Chapter 3: Creating Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Introduction to Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Sketches and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Sharing Sketch Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Working with Sketch Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140The Sketch Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Using a Part Face to Define a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Direct Model Edge Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Creating Reference Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Overview of Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154The Extrude Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Specifying Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Exercise: Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Overview of Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167The Revolve Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Contentsii

Page 7: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Exercise: Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Default Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181The Work Plane Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Examples of Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Work Plane Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Exercise: Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Default Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192The Work Axis Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Example of Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Work Axis Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Exercise: Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Center Point Work Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202The Work Point Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Grounded Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Additional Examples of Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Exercise: Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Fillet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

The Fillet Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Exercise: Fillet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Chamfer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232The Chamfer Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Exercise: Chamfer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Hole and Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240The Hole Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Exercise: Hole and Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250The Shell Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Exercise: Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255The Rectangular Pattern Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256The Circular Pattern Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Exercise: Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Face Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

iiiCopyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 8: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Face Draft Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Exercise: Face Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Introduction to Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Assembly Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Assembly Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Assembly Panel Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288In-Place Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Visibility Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Assembly Resequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Assembly Restructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Browser Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Browser Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Enabled Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Grounded Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Design Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Exercise: Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302The Place Component Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Sources of Placed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Dragging Components into an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Creating Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Creating Parts in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Using Work Features in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Using 2D Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Using Projected Edges and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Moving Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Degrees of Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Unconstrained Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Constrained Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Constraint Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Moving and Rotating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Exercise: Moving Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Placing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Basic Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Viewing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Contentsiv

Page 9: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Using ALT-Drag to Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Exercise: Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Adaptive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Introduction to Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Methods for Creating Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Adaptive Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Adaptive Occurrence in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Applying Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Tips and Considerations for Using Adaptivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Exercise: Adaptive Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Assembly Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364The Analyze Interference Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365The Analyze Faces Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Locating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Exercise: Assembly Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Creating a Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Creating Tweaks and Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Animating a Presentation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Exercise: Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Setting Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Editing the Default Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Using a Sheet Format for Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411Creating Multiple Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Creating Sheet Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Defining a Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Defining a Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419Editing Title Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421Exercise: Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Creating a Base View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426Creating Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429Editing Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432Exercise: Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Creating Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

vCopyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 10: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441Editing Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443Exercise: Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446Creating Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447Editing Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450Exercise: Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452Creating Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453Editing Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456Exercise: Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460Creating Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Editing Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463Exercise: Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465Creating Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466Editing Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469Exercise: Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Managing Views and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471Aligning Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472Deleting a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476Copy Views between Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477Moving Views between Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478Exercise: Managing Views and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

Dimensioning a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480Retrieving Model Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481Placing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

General Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491Annotating Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492Annotating Centerlines and Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500Notes and Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511Placing Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516Exercise: General Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Chapter 8: Project Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525Irrigation Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

Contentsvi

Page 11: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Preface

Page 12: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

PrefacePreface

Preface

IntroductionWelcome to Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials Courseware, a training manual for use in Authorized Training Centers and in corporate training and classroom settings.

Although this manual is designed to be used as a teaching tool for instructor-led courses, it can also be used for self-paced learning. The primary objectives of the manual are to help you become productive quickly with the features and functionality of Autodesk Inventor 8, and to encourage self-learning through the use of the Autodesk Inventor Design Support System (DSS).

Course ObjectivesAt the end of this course, you will be able to:

PrerequisitesThis course is designed to teach new users of Autodesk Inventor the essential elements of using Autodesk Inventor 8 for Mechanical Design. 2D Drafters wanting to learn the basics of 3D design techniques are also encouraged to attend this course.

It is recommended that you have a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0/Windows 2000, or Windows XP, and a working knowledge of parametric solid modeling concepts.

Note

This manual is part of the Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) series designed primarily for instructor-led classes.

Instructor-led training in either short or long courses is an effective method to learn computer application software.

Autodesk Inventor is designed for easy learning. The integrated Design Support System (DSS) provides you with ongoing support as well as access to online documentation.

Each chapter in this manual has instructional design so that it is easy to follow and understand. Each exercise is task-oriented and is based on real-world examples of mechanical engineering.

Preface2

Page 13: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter Flow• Introduction and Objectives. Provides an introduction to the chapter

theme and states specific learning objectives for the chapter.

• Topics. Each chapter is a collection of topics that together form the theme of the chapter. Each topic contains an Introduction, Concepts, Objectives, Prerequisite and Summary.

• Summary. Summarizes the chapter.

Notes and TipsThroughout this courseware, there are Notes and Tips included for special attention.

Exercise Data Files

Tip

Tips provide special information that will enhance your productivity within the topic.

Note

Notes can contain information that provides guidelines, constraints or warnings about the topic.

3Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 14: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise Data FilesThe exercise data files for this manual are supplied in a self-installing file called Setup.exe on the Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials CD attached to the back cover of your book.

Installing the Exercise Data FilesTo install the files:

ProjectsMost engineers work on several projects at a time, and each project may consist of a number of files. To accommodate this, Autodesk Inventor uses projects to help organize related files and maintain links between files.

Each exercise has a project file that stores the paths to all the files related to the exercise. When you attempt to open a file, Autodesk Inventor uses the paths in the current project file to locate other necessary files. To work on a different project, you set a new project active in the Project Editor.

Step

1. Insert the Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer and follow the instructions in the setup wizard. If the wizard does not automatically start, browse to the root directory of the CD and double-click Setup.exe.

2. By default, the exercise files will be installed to the C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AOTC\Inventor 8\Essentials folder unless you use the Browse button to specify a different folder.

3. The Essentials folder contains the files necessary to complete each exercise in the training manual.

Preface4

Page 15: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In this chapterAfter completing this chapter, you will be able to...

• Start an Autodesk Inventor design session.

• Create a design using various methods and workflows.

• Create and edit project files for use in different environments and situations.

• Identify the main interface components found in Autodesk Inventor software.

• Access the help system and other online resources for learning Autodesk Inventor software.

Introduction to the Modeling Process

Chapter IntroductionIn this chapter you learn about...

• File types in Autodesk Inventor.

• The typical workflow on a design session in Autodesk Inventor, different assembly modeling concepts, and the types of files you can create and use with Autodesk Inventor software.

• Project files in Autodesk Inventor.

• Different types of project files and the environments in which they should be used.

• Creating and editing project files.

• The main interface components found in Autodesk Inventor software.

• The Browser, Panel Bar, and other interface features that are common to all Autodesk Inventor design environments.

• The Design Support System or DSS.

• The help system and tutorials available to Autodesk Inventor users.

• The online help and tutorials available for learning.

Page 16: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Getting StartedOverview

Overview

OverviewIn this lesson you will learn the Autodesk Inventor software interface, workflow, and file types.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Start an Autodesk Inventor design session.

• Understand the concept of Parametric Modeling.

• Understand the typical design workflow when using Autodesk Inventor.

• Understand the available file types in Autodesk Inventor.

• Understand how to use template files.

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process6

Page 17: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Starting an Autodesk Inventor Design SessionProcedureThe first time you start an Autodesk Inventor design session, the open dialog box will appear showing the Getting Started screen with links to various resources. If you are new to Autodesk Inventor or if you have just upgraded to the most current release, this screen will present you with links to some helpful information.

Getting Started• See "What's New" in Autodesk Inventor: This link opens a help file

containing all the new features in this release.

• Learn about constraints: This option launches a multi-media presentation that will teach you about constraints.

• Learn about AutoCAD to Inventor Help: This option launches a help file specifically designed for AutoCAD users making the transition to Autodesk Inventor. Features include slide graphics with links to specific help files and other information related to the differences between the software applications.

• Learn how to build models quickly: This option opens the main page to a series of helpful tutorials such as Using Constraints, Creating a Part, Creating Assemblies, and Advanced Topics.

• Learn about projects: This option presents the Autodesk Inventor Help - Site Map, with focus on the Autodesk Inventor Projects help links. Each link

Open Dialog Box - Getting Started Pane

7Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 18: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

presents a help topic with specific information on each project.

NewIn the Open dialog box, in the What To Do area, click New and a list of all available templates for creating Autodesk Inventor files will be displayed.

• Default Tab: Lists the default templates based upon the default units type you select during installation.

• English Tab: Lists the available English Unit templates.

• Metric Tab: Lists the available Metric Unit templates.

OpenIn the Open dialog box, in the What To Do area, click Open and the three main areas of the Open dialog box will be displayed.

Open Dialog Box - New Pane

Open Dialog Box - Open Pane

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process8

Page 19: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Locations: This window presents the folders defined in the active project file. Each folder icon represents a shortcut you can select to list its files and subfolders.

• Main Window: All files and folders contained in the selected location are listed in this window.

• Preview Window: This window will display a preview of the selected Autodesk Inventor file.

• Standard Windows Navigation Buttons: Autodesk Inventor uses standard Microsoft Windows® navigation tools in all of its file related dialog boxes.

ProjectsIn the Open dialog box, in the What To Do area, click Projects and Projects - Select a project file areas will be displayed.

• List of Available Projects: Double click on the project to make it active. The active project will have a check mark next to the project name. The Project Location column displays the path where the project is stored.

• Project Definition Pane: This window displays the project categories and paths defined for each category.

More detailed information on Projects will follow later in this chapter.

Open Dialog Box - Projects Pane

9Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 20: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Autodesk Inventor Workflow ConceptsConceptAutodesk Inventor is a parametric modeler. This means that the geometry is controlled by the parameters and/or constraints that you apply. As opposed to non-parametric systems whose dimension values are representative of the size of the geometry.

Another key aspect to Inventor is it ability to create adaptive parts. Adaptivity enables you to create dynamic relationships between parts in an assembly. When one part changes, adaptive capabilities in Autodesk Inventor will enable the related parts to change without the need to create complex cross-part parametric equations.

For example, when you create a 2D sketch in a parametric modeler, you focus only on the shape of the sketch. You do not need to draw your lines and circles at specific lengths or diameters. After you create the sketch you place the required dimensions and the sketch geometry will update to reflect the dimension values you enter. As you create these dimensions, they are stored as individual parameters which you can change at a later time. If the parameter changes, the geometry to which it has been applied will also change to reflect the new value of the parameter.

Sketch - Before and After Dimensions

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process10

Page 21: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The parametric capability then extends beyond the sketch level to the 3D feature level. When you extrude your 2D sketch, the depth of the extrusion is also stored as a parameter and is then used to drive the geometry representing the extrusion.

As you create your parametric model, the parameters are stored in a table that you can access later and change if necessary. These parameters are created automatically and are used by the application to resolve geometry as new features are added.

Note: Is is possible to change these parameters to include formulas or use recognizable names such as Length and Width.

After you create the part, you may use it in an assembly file along with other parts. The parametric capabilities are now extended to the assembly environment by using 3D Constraints to constrain the parts together. Constraint properties such as Offset and Angle values are stored as parameters within the assembly.

11Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 22: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The image below represents the basic file references that exist in a typical parametric design.

After you create the parts and assembly, the parametric technology is extended to the drawing environment. Drawing views are created and maintain an associative link to the part and assembly. It is possible to retrieve the parametric dimensions used in creating the geometry as well as additional dimensions as required. If changes occur in the part or assembly files, those changes will be reflected in the drawing.

Basic Parametric File Relationships

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process12

Page 23: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Autodesk Inventor WorkflowProcedureAutodesk Inventor has been designed to facilitate the typical workflow you will encounter in the design process. Because typical design workflow changes and evolves with the design, the workflow for creating designs in Autodesk Inventor is flexible. With the exception of a couple of fundamental rules, there is no set workflow for creating designs using Autodesk Inventor. As the designer, you will choose the appropriate path based upon your design intent.

In this lesson you will learn the typical workflow of an Autodesk Inventor design session.

Overall Workflow of a Typical Autodesk Inventor Design Session.The overall workflow of any Autodesk Inventor design will involve the following steps, within each step further variations will occur.

As you proceed through this course, you learn more about each of the steps listed below.

• Be aware of your current Autodesk Inventor Project. Projects are used to resolve file references for assemblies, presentations, and drawings.

• Use one of the templates provided to create your new part.

• On the initial sketch you create, draw the profile of the parts base feature.

• Use both Sketched and Placed Features to create the 3D geometry you require for your design.

• Place and constrain the parts in the 3D Assembly (required only when the component is part of a larger assembly of components).

Typical Autodesk Inventor Design Workflow

13Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 24: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• If the design requires an exploded view, create the Presentation representing the exploded assembly.

• Creating 2D Drawings.

Part Design WorkflowThe following steps represent the overall workflow for creating parts using Autodesk Inventor software.

• Use one of the part templates provided to create a new part.

• All new parts you create will have a blank sketch automatically placed. Create the profile of your geometry on the initial sketch.

• You then use sketched features such as Extrude and Revolve to create your Base Feature.

• You create Additional Sketched and/or Placed features as required to generate the necessary 3D geometry.

Assembly Creation WorkflowThe following steps represent the overall workflow for creating assemblies using Autodesk Inventor software.

• Create a new assembly using one of the assembly templates provided.

• Place existing parts into the assembly or create new parts in the context of the assembly.

• Use standard assembly constraints such as Mate, Angle, Tangent and Insert to position and constrain the parts to other parts in the assembly.

• Repeat the steps above until all components are added to the assembly.

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process14

Page 25: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Drawing Creation WorkflowThe following steps represent the overall workflow for creating drawings using Autodesk Inventor software.

• Use one of the drawing templates provided to create a new drawing.

• Use standard view creation tools to create the required 2D drawing views.

• Use the annotation tools to create the required annotation.

• Repeat the steps above to create additional sheets and views as required.

Part FilesPrinciplePart files represent the foundation of all designs using Autodesk Inventor. You use the part file to describe the individual parts which make up an assembly. The file extension is *.ipt

15Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 26: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly FilesPrinciple Assembly files consist of multiple part files assembled in a single file to represent your assembly. You use assembly constraints to constrain all of the parts to each other. The assembly file contains references to all of its component files. File extension: *.iam

Presentation FilesPrincipleYou use presentation files to create exploded views of the assembly. It is also possible to animate the exploded views to simulate how the assembly should be put together or taken apart. File extension: *.ipn

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process16

Page 27: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Drawing FilesPrincipleYou use drawing files to create the necessary 2D documentation of your design. Drawing files include dimensions, annotations, and views required for manufacturing. When you use a drawing file to create 2D views of an existing 3D model, the views are associative to the 3D model and changes in model geometry are automatically reflected in the drawing. You can also use drawing files to create simple 2D drawings in much the same way you would use other 2D drawing programs. File extension: *.idw

17Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 28: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using Templates FilesPrincipleTemplate files serve as the basis for all new files you create using Autodesk Inventor software. By using the template files you create, properties such as units, snap spacing, and default tolerances are automatically applied to your new file.

Autodesk Inventor offers template files for each type of file. Template files are categorized into two main groups: (a) English for english units, inch and feet and (b) Metric, for metric units such as millimeter and meter.

The Open dialog box offers three tabs: (a) Default, (b) English, and (c) Metric. The Default tab presents templates based upon the default unit you select during installation, while the English and Metric tabs present template files for their respective units.

To create a new Autodesk Inventor file, click the tab representing the required unit type, then select the appropriate template and click Open.

Open Dialog Box - Templates

Tip

Need Your Own Custom Template Tab?Create a new folder containing at least one file in the templates folder of your Autodesk Inventor installation. The next time you create a new Autodesk Inventor file, a new tab will appear in the Open dialog box with the name of your new folder.

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process18

Page 29: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Projects in Autodesk InventorOverview

Overview

OverviewYou use project files to resolve path locations of Autodesk Inventor software files. When an assembly file is loaded, the location of the part files must be resolved. The same is true when loading a drawing or presentation files.

In this lesson you will learn the concept and implementation of Autodesk Inventor software Project files.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Understand the concept of Projects

• Understand the concept of Autodesk Inventor project files

• Setup Autodesk Inventor Projects

• Create Autodesk Inventor Projects

• Edit Autodesk Inventor Project files

Active Project

19Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 30: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Project ConceptsProject ConceptsWhen you use Autodesk Inventor software to create designs, each one will consist of multiple files and file types. The design and documentation of a single part file will require at least two separate files: (a) a part file and (b) a drawing file. The design and documentation of assembly models will require a minimum three different file types: (a) assembly files, (b) part files, and (c) drawing files.

Using separate files for each file type is critical for performance and is common among most parametric modeling systems. This is the sole purpose of project files. By storing path information for each project, Autodesk Inventor software knows exactly where to look for the required files when opening an assembly, presentation, or drawing file.

The below image represents file dependencies that exist in a typical assembly design.

When you open an assembly, drawing, or presentation file, the active project file is used to resolve path locations to the referenced files.

Typical File Dependencies

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process20

Page 31: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Project FilesProject Files - ConceptWhen you create designs you probably organize them in different folder locations. The same is true for Autodesk Inventor Project files. You will generally create one project file for each design you create.

There is no limit to the number of project files you can create, but only one project can be active at any time. In the below image, the active project is identified by the check mark.

Project File CategoriesEach Project file is divided into separate categories in which you will define different paths. A typical Autodesk Inventor design will make use of some or all of these categories depending on the structure of your assembly and the environment in which you are working.

• Included File: In a semi-isolated environment, the master project shared by the design team is included in individual projects so that all data in the workgroup folder are accessible and managed from a single project.

• Workspace: A personal location where you edit your personal copy of design files in single-user, semi-isolated, and vault modes. For single-user and vault modes, the workspace should be the only defined editable location. Only one designer should use a project with a defined workspace in a single session of Autodesk Inventor at a time.

• Local Search Paths: Avoid using a local search path except for design exploration. Do not use it for design project data. Do not make a local search

Example List of Available Projects

Project File Categories

21Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 32: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

path a subfolder of the workspace folder. Local search paths are searched after the workspace is searched.

• Workgroup Search Paths: Workgroup folder locations are defined in the project workgroup search path and are the master project locations used by shared and semi-isolated modes for file check out and check in.

• Libraries: You use this category to define search paths for part libraries. Part libraries can consist of standard off-the-shelf components that you use in your designs, or can also include common parts that you design. The common factors in all Libraries is that the path is considered by Autodesk Inventor software to be read-only and parts stored within a library search path rarely, if ever, change. If library folders are defined, each needs a descriptive name that should not change. Because the library name is stored in the reference, changing the library name later will break library references.

• Options: You use these properties to set specific options for the Project file.

Project Categories - Search OrderKnowing and remembering the category search order is critical to properly implementing and managing project files. The below image represents a typical Project file with path locations defined in each category. When Autodesk Inventor software needs to locate referenced files, it will search for files using paths contained in each category using the following order.

1. Libraries2. Workspace3. Local Search Paths4. Workgroup Search Paths

A simple way to remember the search order is to remember Libraries first, then the order each category appears in the Project window.

When examining this diagram, you will see the assembly file is stored in a different location from the component files.

• Component files exist in the Components folder.

• Assembly files exist in the Robot Assembly folder.

Project Category Search Order

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process22

Page 33: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Because the Components folder is a sub-folder of the defined workspace, it is used to resolve the component locations. The Hex Cap Screw is stored in a folder defined as a Library category.

File Resolution Example

23Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 34: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Project SetupProcedureHow you setup your Projects will depend largely on the type of environment in which you are working. For example, setting up Projects for a single user environment will differ from multi-user environment.

In this lesson you will learn how to setup Project files for both a single-user and multi-user environment.

Open Dialog Box - Project PaneThe Projects portion of the Open dialog box is divided in to two panes.

Select Project Pane: Select a Project to edit or double-click on a Project to activate it.

Note: You cannot edit the active Project or activate a different project, if there are files open in Autodesk Inventor software.

Edit Project Pane: Select the category or right-click on the option you want to change. When you edit search paths they are divided into two sections: (a) Named Shortcut and (b) Category Search Path.

• The Named Shortcut will appear in the Open dialog box, enabling you to easily navigate to the search path.

• The Category Search Path stores the path location.

Typical Single-User Project

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process24

Page 35: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Open Dialog Box - Location ShortcutsWhen you Open files, the Locations area of the dialog box displays all of the Named Shortcuts contained in the active Project.

Using Relative Paths in Your Project FilesIt is possible to set your Project file to use relative paths instead of storing the complete path in each category. Using relative paths enables greater portability of your Project Files and datasets. When you enable the Use Relative Paths setting, the path settings begin with .\ followed by the folder location relative to the physical location of the Project file. In the following example, the Robot-Assembly.ipj file is stored in the folder C:\Designs\Robot Assembly.

Relative Paths On/Off

25Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 36: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

When you use relative paths in your Project file, it is possible to physically move the entire folder structure to another location or storage device. As long as the folders maintain their relative location to the storage location of the Project file, Autodesk Inventor will be able to resolve the files as required.

Project File LocationWe recommend that you store your project file in the upper level folder of your project design folders. This will help to keep your project file organized with your designs and will simplify portability issues.

Projects Folder OptionBecause you can store your project files in a number of different locations, you need an efficient way of locating them. Rather than search every folder on your computer or network, Autodesk Inventor software uses Windows® shortcuts to point to the project files that have been accessed on your computer.

On the Tools menu, click Application Options, then click the Files tab. The default Projects Folder option is will be set to your My Documents folder. If you would like to use a different path for your Project files, enter or browse a new location.

Typical File Structure - Project File Location

Options Dialog Box - Projects Folder

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process26

Page 37: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In the below image, the My Documents folder is selected to list all files. The Project file shortcuts in the right-hand pane of the Explorer window are not the actual project files. They are Windows® shortcuts to the actual project files.

Setting Up Folder StructuresA typical project might have parts and assemblies unique to the project, standard components unique to your company, and off-the-shelf components such as fasteners, fittings, or electrical components.

To reduce the possibility of file resolution problems, set up a folder structure before you create a project and start saving files. To help organize your design files, it is a good idea to set up subfolders under your project workspace or workgroup folder. You can keep all your design files for a project in the subfolders, making it a logical way to organize the files used in a design project. Because references are stored as relative paths from project folders, if you change the folder structure, move, or rename files, you are likely to break file references.

Always save new files in the workspace or workgroup defined for your project or one of its subfolders.

Use these guidelines as you create a folder structure for files associated with a project:

• Follow your company standards and naming conventions for the project folders.

• If you plan to edit files from existing designs, copy them to the desired workspace or workgroup subfolder.

• If you intend to reference existing design files, copy them to a library folder, or define a library in your project that locates the root folder of the project in which the parts were released.

• Keep the subfolder structure relatively flat and do not store files that are unrelated to the project under the root folder. Avoid storing more than one hundred files in a single folder.

Listing of Project File Shortcuts

27Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 38: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Multi-User Project SettingsThere are four Multi-User settings that you can use to control the type of Project. The setting you choose will largely depend upon your working environment.

• Off (Single User): You use this option for a single-user environment where Check-In and Check-Out capabilities are not required because the data is not shared with others in a workgroup.All design files are in one folder (the workspace) and its subdirectories, except for files referenced from libraries.Original files are stored in a personal workspace that is intended to be used by only a single user.You do not have to check out files.The file check-out status is not available in the browser.

• Shared: Shared user mode is only appropriate for small design groups with well-defined roles for editing design files. Of the multi-user modes, shared is the least flexible because all design team members share a single workgroup location. If one designer is doing most of the work, you can locate the workgroup on his or her computer and make it available as a network share to other team members.A shared project defines a workgroup location and one or more library locations. Set the project to Use Relative Paths = True, and locate the Workgroup at .\. Place the project

Typical Multi-User Off (single) project setup

Included File Not defined.

Workspace search paths One defined at .\. (Same location as project file.)

Local search paths Not defined.

Workgroup search paths Not defined.

Library Locations One or more defined. If library folders are defined, each needs a descriptive name that should not change. Because the library name is stored in the reference, changing the library name later will break library references.

Options Multi User = Off

Use relative path = True

Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required).

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process28

Page 39: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

(.ipj) in the workgroup folder.Design team members share the workgroup location, where they make and save file changes.Design team members open, work on, and save the original files directly in the workgroup folders where they are stored, rather than copy them locally.Designers can see when someone has a file checked out and are prevented from replacing the work of one another. Note that checking out a file does not protect it from being moved, copied, or deleted using Microsoft® Windows Explorer.Design team members always have access to the most up-to-date versions when they open files or refresh them.A file status browser shows the check-out status of project files that are in the workgroup and workspace locations. You can check files in and out from the file status browser. Canceling a check out makes it available to other designers but does not restore it to its state before check out.

• Semi-Isolated: If Autodesk Vault is not available, semi-isolated mode is the most powerful of the multi-user options. Unlike the vault, you have access to only the number of file versions you specify in the project, and cannot access vault advanced database query and configuration capabilities. Semi-isolated mode is useful when you need to isolate a part or subassembly, or work with copies of parts and assemblies to evaluate design variations. If necessary, after you make design changes and decide to discard them, you can cancel the

Typical Shared mode project setup

Included File Not defined.

Workspace search paths One defined at .\. (Same location as project file.)

Local search paths Not defined.

Workgroup search paths Not defined.

Library Locations One or more defined. If library folders are defined, each needs a descriptive name that should not change. Because the library name is stored in the reference, changing the library name later will break library references.

Options Multi User = Shared

Use relative path = True

Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required).

29Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 40: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

check out to revert the file back to the original file.One advantage semi-isolated mode has over vault mode is that each designer needs only enough workspace storage for files he or she is actively editing, and there is no need to update the workspace to see changes other designers have checked in. Each designer always has access to the latest checked-in changes, plus any personal changes.All design team members share a master project, which is included in their personal project, and defines the workgroup and library locations of the design project data files.Checking out files automatically copies them from the workgroup to your personal workspace for editing. Checked-out files are saved to your personal workspace after editing. Files not checked out continue to be referenced from the central work group location and cannot be saved.Design team members do not see changes to files saved by others until the files are checked in to the workgroup location.A file status browser shows the check-out status of project files that are in the workgroup and workspace locations. You can check files in and out from the file status browser.Upon file check in, the file is automatically copied from your personal workspace to the workgroup removed from your personal workspace, and the previous version moved to the OldVersions folder. The workgroup uses this new version when the file is opened or checked out in the future.Canceling a check out removes the file reservation, deletes the workspace version, and leaves the original file in the workgroup. No changes are saved to the file.

When you save a file, the previous version is moved to the OldVersions folder. Any designer that already had the file open will continue to access that version until they refresh or close and reopen the file.

Master Project (shared by entire group) setup

Included File Not defined.

Workspace search path Not defined.

Local search paths Not defined.

Workgroup search paths One defined at .\.

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process30

Page 41: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Vault: (You must install Autodesk® Vault to use this mode.)

Library Locations When library locations are defined, each must have a descriptive name that does not change and a UNC-based location. The library name is stored as part of the references to files it contains.

Library locations can be defined to be in a subfolder of the workgroup, particularly for cases such as the content library. For example, the name would be Content Library and the location would be ./Content Library.

Options Multi User = Semi-Isolated

Use relative path = True

Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required).

Personal Project (one for each user) setup

Included File Location of the workgroup project using a UNC path. You can browse to the included file from the project editor or enter the path.

Workspace search paths Location of your personal workspace. Locate the personal project at .\(your personal workspace folder).

Local search paths Not defined.

Workgroup search paths Not defined. It is inherited from the group project file.

Library Locations Not defined. It is inherited from the group project file.

Options Use relative path = True

Other options are inherited from the master project.

Master Project (shared by entire group) setup

31Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 42: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating ProjectsProcedureYou begin to create project files via a wizard type interface. You are prompted to fill in the relevant information such as Type of Project, Project Name, Workspace Folder, and Libraries to import from other Projects. After the initial creation is complete, you proceed to adding the required paths to the categories you will use.

In this lesson you will learn how to create a project file.

Access MethodsYou can use either the Autodesk Inventor internal project editor or the standalone project editor to create new projects.

Process Overview - Creating Single User ProjectsThe following steps represent an overview for creating a Single User Project.

1. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, click New.2. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Single User Project

and click Next.

Menu File > Projects

Standalone Project Editor Start > Programs > Inventor 8 > Tools > Project Editor

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process32

Page 43: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. In the Name field, enter Flange-Assembly and in the Project (Workspace) Folder field, enter C:\Designs\FlangeAssembly. Click Next.

4. If you have any projects with Libraries defined, they will appear in this list. This enables you to copy Library Paths from other project files. Click Finish to create the project. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

33Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 44: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Process Overview - Creating Semi-Isolated ProjectsThe following steps represent an overview for creating a Semi-Isolated Project. Your begin by creating a Master Project.

1. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, click New.2. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Semi-Isolated Master

Project and click next.

3. In the Name field, enter a name for the Master Project. In the Project (Workgroup) Folder, enter a path to the Workgroup folder and click Next.

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process34

Page 45: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

4. If you have any projects with Libraries defined, they will appear in this list. This enables you to copy Library Paths from other project files. Click Finish to create the project. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

After you create your Master Project you create a Personal Project.

1. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, select the Master Project to use for your Personal Project, then click New.

35Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 46: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Semi-Isolated Workspace and click Next.

3. In the Name field, enter a name for your Workspace Project and enter a path for your workspace. Verify the Master Project File is listed correctly and click Finish. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process36

Page 47: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing ProjectsProcedureYou can use the internal Project Editor or the Standalone Project Editor located on the Windows® Start menu to edit projects. In the Select Project Pane, select the Project to edit. In the Edit Project Pane select the category or option you need to edit. Depending on the item you edit, different options will be available on both the shortcut menu and to the right of the Edit Project Pane.

Command AccessThere are two methods available for editing projects.

When editing projects, right-clicking on the various categories or options will display the following shortcut menus.

Menu File > Projects

Standalone Project Editor Start > Programs > Inventor 8 > Tools > Project Editor

Project Pane - Open Dialog Box

37Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 48: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Included File Options

Open: This option opens the project file used in the included file link.

Edit: This option edits the link to the included project file.

Delete: This option deletes the link to the included project file.

Workspace and Library Category Options

Add Path: This option adds a path to the workspace category. Enter a named shortcut and search path in the fields below the category.

Add Paths from File...: This option adds the workspace path contained in another project file. A dialog box will appear for you to select the project file.

Paste Path: This option pastes a path that was copied to the clipboard.

Delete Section Paths: This option deletes all paths from the category.

Local and Workgroup Category Search Path Options

Add Path: This option adds a path to the workspace category.

Add Paths from File...: This option adds the workspace path contained in another project file. A dialog box will appear for you to select the project file.

Add Paths from Directory...: Select this option to add the path of a selected directory including all sub-directories.

Paste Path: Select this option to paste a path that was copied to the clipboard.

Delete Section Paths: Select this option to delete all paths from the category.

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process38

Page 49: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Multi-User Options

Off: Use this option for a single-user environment where Check-In and Check-Out capabilities are not required because the data is not shared with others in a workgroup.

Shared: Use this option in a workgroup environment where multiple users may access the same data files. This option enables you to take advantage of the Check-Out/Check-In features. When you edit any file, you will be prompted to check the file out at which time, the file will remain in its current folder but will be locked from editing by other users.

Semi-Isolated: Use this option in a workgroup environment where multiple users may be accessing the same data files. When you edit a file, you will be prompted to check the file out at which time the file will be copied to the workspace defined in your project. The original file remains in its original location, but it is locked from editing until you check-in the version contained in your workspace folder.

Vault: Only available if Autodesk Vault is installed.

Edit and Position ButtonsEdit and Position Buttons appear on the right-side of the Projects dialog box.

Move Up: Select this option to move the selected path up in the search order within its category.

Move Down: Select this option to move the selected path down in the search order within its category.

Add Path: Select this option to add a path to the selected category.

Edit Path: Select this option to edit the selected path.

Note

Editing the Active ProjectYou must close all files in Autodesk Inventor before attempting to edit the active project.

39Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 50: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Projects in Autodesk InventorPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will create the Project file to be used for the remainder of this course. You are creating a Single User Project file with a Workspace and Library.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling

Process

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process, click Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Completed Active Project File

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process40

Page 51: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The User InterfaceOverview

Overview

OverviewIn this lesson you will learn about the Autodesk Inventor 8 software interface.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Identify the Browser in the Assembly, Part, Presentation, and Drawing environments

• Identify the Panel Bar

• Identify the Standard toolbar and groups of standard tools

• Understand how the menu structure is context sensitive based upon the environment you are using

• Identify and use Keyboard Shortcuts

• Identify the 3D Indicator and what it represents

Autodesk Inventor Interface

41Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 52: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The BrowserProcedureThe Browser is one of your main interface components. It is context sensitive with the environment you use. For example, when you work on an assembly you use the browser to present information specific to the assembly environment. While you use the Part Modeling environment, the browser displays information that is relevant to part modeling.

As you progress through this course, you will use the various browser modes.

Part Modeling EnvironmentWhen you use the browser in the Part Modeling Environment, it will display the origin folder containing the default X, Y, and Z Planes, Axes, and Center Point. It will also list all features you use to create the part. Features are listed in the order in which they are created.

Assembly Modeling Environment - Position ViewWhen you use the browser in the Assembly Modeling Environment, it displays the origin folder containing the default X, Y, and Z Planes, Axes, and Center Point. It will also list all parts you use in the assembly.

Nested under each part you will see the assembly constraints. If you select an assembly constraint, an edit box will appear at the bottom of the browser enabling you to edit the offset or angle value for the constraint.

Browser - Part Modeling

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process42

Page 53: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Note: If you select the Position View drop-down button you can select Modeling View to switch the browser to display the part features nested under the parts instead of the assembly constraints. This is useful when performing part modeling functions in the context of the assembly.

Presentation EnvironmentWhen you use the browser in the Presentation environment, it will display the Presentation views you create followed by the tweaks you use for the explosion. When you expand each weak you will see the part(s) included in each one. It is also possible to select the button to switch the browser mode from Tweak View to Sequence View or Assembly View.

Browser - Assembly Modeling

Browser - Presentation View

43Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 54: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Drawing EnvironmentIn the Drawing Environment, the browser displays the Drawing Resource folder containing sheet formats, borders, title blocks and sketched symbols. It will also display each sheet in the drawing along with the views you create for each.

Browser - Drawing Modeling

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process44

Page 55: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Panel BarProcedureThe panel bar is your primary interface to the tools available while you design. The context sensitive design presents the relevant tools based upon the current context of your design session. For example, when you switch from assembly modeling to part modeling, the panel bar will automatically switch to display the correct tools for the context where you work.

The Assembly Panel Bar is displayed below in the default Learning mode. The tool icons, names, and keyboard shortcuts are displayed.

Select the Assembly Panel drop-down menu and click Expert. The Panel Bar switches to Expert mode. Tools are displayed with icons only. This mode allows more area for the browser window.

Note: You can also access the Expert mode. Right-click anywhere on the Panel Bar and select Expert.

Assembly Panel Bar - Learning Mode

Assembly Panel - Expert Mode

45Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 56: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

You use the Part Modeling Panel Bar to create sketched and placed features in the modeling environment.

You use the Sketch Panel Bar in the modeling environment and for assembly based sketching to create 2D parametric sketches, dimensions, and constraints.

Part Modeling Panel Bar

Sketch Panel Bar

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process46

Page 57: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

You use the Presentation Panel Bar to create presentation views, tweaks, and animate geometry in the presentation environment.

You use the Drawing Views Panel Bar in the drawing environment to create drawing views on the sheet.

Presentation Panel Bar

Drawing Views Panel Bar

47Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 58: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

You use the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar in the drawing environment to add reference dimensions and other annotation objects.

Drawing Annotation Panel Bar

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process48

Page 59: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

ToolbarsProcedureThere are several toolbars available for you to use, but by default only the Standard toolbar is displayed.

Customizing toolbars is beyond the scope of this course. Please refer to the Autodesk Inventor help system for more information.

Standard ToolbarThe Standard toolbar is displayed here in three separate images. It is organized into groups based upon functionality.

This area of the toolbar displays tools for standard file and modeling operations.

This area of the toolbar displays standard viewing tools such as Zoom All, Zoom Window, Rotate, and others.

This area of the toolbar displays appearance related tools for controlling your model's appearance.

Standard Toolbar - File and Modeling Tools

Standard Toolbar - Viewing Tools

Standard Toolbar - Appearance Tools

49Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 60: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Menu StructureProcedureAutodesk Inventor software utilizes the standard pull-down menu structure common in all Windows application. The menu structure is context sensitive based upon the environment and mode you are using.

As you are learning Autodesk Inventor, you should take the time to familiarize yourself with the different options that appear on the menu while working in different environments.

Insert Menu - Assembly Modeling Environment

Insert Menu - Part Modeling Environment

Insert Menu - Drawing Environment

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process50

Page 61: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Keyboard ShortcutsProcedureOn the panel bar and menus, you will use keyboard shortcuts to access tools. For example, P for Place Component, N for Create Component. Entering the keyboard shortcut is the same as clicking the tool on the panel bar or menu.

Where applicable, the keyboard shortcuts will be listed for the tools as they are explained.

3D IndicatorProcedureWhile using the Assembly, Part Modeling, and Presentation environments, the 3D Indicator is displayed in the lower left area of the graphics window. The indicator displays your current view orientation in relation to the X, Y, Z axis of the coordinate system.

Red: X-Axis Green: Y-Axis Blue: Z-Axis

Shortcut Keys Displayed on Panel Bar

3D Indicator

51Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 62: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: The User InterfacePrint Exercise ReferenceOpen an assembly and explore the Autodesk Interface. You will experiment with different interface objects in the assembly, part modeling, and sketching environments.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling

Process

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process, click Exercise: The User Interface

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process52

Page 63: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Online Help and TutorialsOverview

Overview

OverviewAutodesk Inventor software offers several types of online help and tutorial references. Standard Help files, context sensitive How-To presentations, and Tutorials are all available.

In this lesson you will learn about the different resources available for learning Autodesk Inventor.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Understand Help Topics

• Use the How To Popups

• Access the Help Topic containing information on the new features in this Autodesk Inventor release

• Access tutorials

• Access the Visual Syllabus

• Access the Help for AutoCAD Users

• Access Autodesk Online

Visual Syllabus

53Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 64: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Help TopicsProcedureA comprehensive Help Topics section installs by default. You can access the Help Topics window by using the F1 key or any of the other methods listed below. The Help Topics window is only one component of the Help System.

Access MethodsYou can use either of the following methods to launch the help topic.

Use standard point and click navigation techniques to navigate the help system. You can also enter search words in the left pane of the Help Topics window.

As you navigate to specific topics in the help system, icons may appear in the help topics representing specific tools. Click the icon to start the tool.

Menu Help > Help Topics

Toolbar

Keyboard Shortcut F1

Help Topics - Main Page

Help Topics - Command Launch

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process54

Page 65: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

How To PopupsProcedureThe Help System is context sensitive. It presents information to you in a manner relevant to each task. Right-click in the graphics window, and on the shortcut menu, click How To. A help topic, or in some cases the Show Me help window, will be displayed containing information on the selected tool in an animated sequence.

Access MethodsYou can use the following method to launch the How To Popups.

The below image represents the type of information that is available in the context sensitive How To Popups. The animated sequence will play automatically and you can select the navigation buttons to navigate to specific sequence numbers.

Shortcut Menu Right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu, click How To.

Show Me Help Window

Animated Tangent Line Show Me Presentation

55Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 66: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

What's NewProcedureThe What's New help topic contains information on all new features in the current release of Autodesk Inventor. All changes are organized into main categories such as Drawings, Part Modeling, and Sheet metal. Expand the category of interest and use standard point and click navigation to learn about the new features.

Access MethodsYou can use the following method to launch the What's New help topic.

Menu Help > What's New

What's New - Help Window

What's New - Specific Topic

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process56

Page 67: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

TutorialsProcedureThere are several tutorials available covering a wide range of topics from Introduction to Advanced. From the main tutorial window, use standard point and click navigation techniques to select the topic of interest. The tutorials present step by step information on performing certain tasks in Autodesk Inventor.

Access MethodsYou can use the following method to access the tutorials.

Menu Help > Tutorials

Inventor Tutorials - Main Window and Working with Projects

57Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 68: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Visual SyllabusProcedureThe Visual Syllabus presents topic specific information in an animated presentation. Start the Visual Syllabus, select the main topic, then select specific feature tools available. Information on the features you select will be presented to you in an animation.

Access MethodsYou can use the following method to access the Visual Syllabus.

Standard Toolbar

Visual Syllabus - Main Window and Animated Presentation

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process58

Page 69: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Help For AutoCAD UsersProcedureAutoCAD users can use the Help Topic designed specifically for them as they make the transition to Autodesk Inventor software.

Access MethodsYou can use the following method to access the Help for AutoCAD Users.

The below image represents the main window of the Help for AutoCAD Users help topic. Use standard point and click navigation options to navigate to the topic of choice.

Menu Help > Help for AutoCAD Users

Help for AutoCAD Users - Main Window

AutoCAD - Inventor Command Map

59Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 70: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Autodesk OnlineProcedureAutodesk Online is an e-learning portal to training information available for Autodesk software users. The information is presented via HTML, PDF, and other web-friendly formats. Select the Autodesk Inventor Skill Builders link, you will be arrive at a special area of the Autodesk.com website dedicated to providing e-learning materials and tutorials for the Autodesk Inventor user.

The Autodesk Online portal contains dynamic and new information. It is updated regularly.

Access MethodsYou can use the following method to access the Autodesk Online.

Menu Help > Autodesk Online

Autodesk Online - Skill Builders Link

Autodesk Online

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process60

Page 71: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Online Help and TutorialsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise you will use the online help and tutorials to create a new part with a simple sketch and features.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling

Process

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process, click Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

61Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 72: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling ProcessChallenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process

Print Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will create two new Autodesk Inventor Project files. (a) Create a new Semi-Isolated Project to be used as a Master Project, then create a Personal Workspace Project and use the Included file option to include the Master Project. Utilize the information contained in this chapter as well as the information contained in the Help System to create the required projects.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling

Process

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process, click Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Completed Project File

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process62

Page 73: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter SummarySummary

SummaryYou learned the following in this chapter:

• Starting a design session using Autodesk Inventor software.

• The typical workflow of creating a design in Autodesk Inventor as well as different assembly modeling concepts.

• The file types created by Autodesk Inventor and how to use them in your designs.

• The concept of project files and how they are used to maintain file references between Autodesk Inventor files.

• Creating and editing project files, and which types of projects are used for particular situations.

• The user interface for Autodesk Inventor software.

• Accessing different tools, through the use of keyboard shortcuts.

• Accessing several different resources for learning Autodesk Inventor software.

63Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 74: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process64

Page 75: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In this chapterAfter completing this chapter, you will be able to...

• Create 2D sketches for use in 3D designs.

• Create sketches using the Precise Input toolbar.

• Edit sketches.

• Use the Sketch Doctor to assist in fixing problems with sketches.

• Plan and implement constraints on 2D sketches.

• Apply constraints manually and automatically.

• View and delete constraints that have been applied to geometry.

• Use construction geometry to assist in creating 2D sketch geometry.

• Apply dimensions to sketch geometry.

• Apply dimensions using both manual and automatic methods.

Introduction to Sketching

Chapter IntroductionIn this chapter you learn about...

• Different aspects of creating sketches in Autodesk Inventor software.

• The sketch environment and available sketch tools.

• Rules for creating efficient sketches.

• Using the sketch coordinate system.

• Using the Precise Input toolbar.

• Editing sketches and using the Sketch Doctor to fix problems with sketches.

• Constraining sketches using both automatic and manual 2D constraints.

• Geometric constraints and how they can be used.

• Planning and viewing constraints that have been applied to geometry.

• Using construction geometry to assist you in creating 2D sketches.

• Dimensioning 2D sketches.

• Placing parametric dimensions to control the size of sketch elements.

• Applying dimensions manually and automatically.

• Options for displaying dimensions.

• Guidelines for dimensioning sketches.

Page 76: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

6

Creating SketchesOverview

Overview

OverviewThe fundamental basis for all three-dimensional (3D) designs begins with a sketch. The two-dimensional (2D) geometry contained in the sketch is used to create base features as well as secondary features.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Understand the sketch environment

• Create sketch geometry

• Understand the rules for creating sketches

• Understand the Sketch Coordinate System

• Utilize the Precise Input interface to create sketch geometry

• Edit sketches

• Use the Sketch Doctor to fix sketch geometry

Sketching using the Precise Input toolbar

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching6

Page 77: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Sketch EnvironmentConceptWhen you create sketches, you work in an environment designed specifically for the creation of 2D geometry. Although the geometry varies from part to part, the environment in which the geometry is created is always consistent.

A typical part generally includes multiple sketches positioned along various planes. Each sketch contains different geometry. Because sketches represent the most fundamental part of your design, it is critical that you become comfortable with the environment in which they are created.

Following are some important features in the sketch environment:

Sketch panel bar: Displays the 2D sketching tools available.

Sketch origin indicator: Used to identify the current location and orientation of the sketch origin and axes.

Sketch1: The first sketch in the part. This is automatically created when you create a new part.

Sketch axes: Aligned with the sketch origin indicator, represents the X and Y axes of the sketch.

Autodesk Inventor sketch environment

67Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 78: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Additional SketchesThe first sketch in a new part is automatically created. If you require additional sketches, you must create them manually. A new sketch can be created on a part face, origin plane, or work plane.

Access Methods

Toolbar Select the Sketch tool > Select a face or plane to orient the sketch.

Shortcut Menu Right-click the face of a part or a work plane, and on the shortcut menu click New Sketch.

Creating additional sketches

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching68

Page 79: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Sketch ToolsProcedureIn the sketch environment, the Panel Bar automatically switches to display the available sketch tools. The 2D Sketch Panel contains all of the tools to assist in creating sketch geometry.

In this lesson you learn about the most common sketch tools: Line, Arc, Rectangle, Circle, Fillet, and Chamfer. Editing tools are covered in a later chapter. If necessary, refer to the Help Topics for more information about sketch tools.

Line ToolThe Line tool enables you to create line segments on the sketch.

Sketch Panel Bar

Panel Bar

Shortcut Key L

69Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 80: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Process Overview - Creating LinesThe following steps represent an overview for creating lines in your sketch.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Line tool and pick a starting point for the line segment.2. Drag your cursor in the direction you want to draw the line. Note the appearance

of the Constraint Glyph. This glyph indicates the type of constraint that is being applied automatically to the line segments.

Pick a point to end the line segment.3. Drag the cursor in the direction of the next line segment, again paying attention

to the Constraint Glyph indicating the automatic constraint.

Pick a point to end the line segment.4. Continue drawing line segments as required.

If the Constraint Glyph represents a constraint that you would like to change, scrub geometry on the sketch for the constraint to be applied and continue drawing the line segment. In the image sequence below, the first image shows that the third line segment is being constrained parallel to the first segment, the second image demonstrates by scrubbing a different sketch element, and the third image shows that the constraint is now inferred to the sketch element being scrubbed.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching70

Page 81: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

5. Continue drawing line segments as required.

6. Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu.

Circle ToolThe Circle tool enables you to create circles on the sketch.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Key SHIFT+C

71Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 82: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Process Overview - Creating CirclesThe following steps represent an overview for creating circles in your sketch.

1. To create a center point circle, on the Panel Bar click the Center Point Circle tool and select the center point of the circle.

2. Drag your cursor to a location representing the outside perimeter of the circle and pick that point to create the circle.

3. Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu.4. To create a 3-Point Tangent Circle, on the Panel Bar, click the Tangent Circle tool.5. Select three parts of the geometry that the circle will be tangent to.

6. Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching72

Page 83: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Arc ToolThe Arc tool enables you to create arcs on the sketch.

Process Overview - Creating ArcsThe following steps represent an overview for creating arcs in your sketch.

Creating Center Point Arcs:

• On the Panel Bar, click the Center Point Arc tool then pick a point representing the center of the arc.

• Pick a point representing the start point of the arc.Note: Arcs are created in a counterclockwise direction so pick your start point accordingly.

Panel Bar

73Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 84: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Pick a point representing the endpoint of the arc.

• Right-click in the graphics window, and on the shortcut menu click Done.

Creating Tangent Arcs:

• On the Panel Bar, click the Tangent Arc tool and pick the geometry being used for the arcs tangency.

• Drag your cursor and pick the endpoint of the arc. Note the Center Point Projection as you approach a 90-, 180-, or 270-degree arc.

• Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching74

Page 85: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating 3-Point Arcs:

• On the Panel Bar, click the Three Point Arc tool and pick the start point of the arc.

• Pick a point for the endpoint of the arc.

• Drag your cursor to size the arc appropriately. Depending upon existing geometry and arc size, constraint glyphs may appear.

• Right-click in the graphics window, and on the shortcut menu click Done.

75Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 86: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Rectangle ToolThe Rectangle tool enables you to create rectangles on the sketch.

Process Overview - Creating RectanglesThe following steps represent an overview for creating rectangles in your sketch.

Creating a Two-Point Rectangle:

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Two Point Rectangle tool.2. Pick a point representing the first corner of the rectangle, then pick a point

representing the opposite corner of the rectangle.

3. Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menuCreating a Three-Point Rectangle: To create rectangles at angles other than 0 and 90 degrees.

4. On the Panel Bar, click the Three Point Rectangle tool.5. Pick a point representing the first corner of the rectangle.

Panel Bar

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching76

Page 87: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

6. Pick a point representing the second point of the rectangle.

7. Then drag the cursor to size the rectangle.

8. Right-click in the graphics window, and on the shortcut menu click Done.

Fillet ToolThe Fillet tool enables you to create fillets on the sketch.

Radius: Enter a radius for the fillet feature.

Applies an equal constraint to all fillets you create during the current session of the Fillet tool.

Process Overview - Creating FilletsThe following steps represent an overview for creating fillets in your sketch.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Fillet tool and enter a radius for the fillet. If you are creating multiple fillets of equal sizes, click the Equal option.

Panel Bar

2D Fillet Dialog Box

77Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 88: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2. Pick the corner of the geometry being filleted or select each line separately.

3. Continue selecting geometry or corners to be filleted. Notice with the Equal option set, a dimension appears on only the first fillet you create.

4. When you are finished adding fillets, right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu.

Chamfer ToolThe Chamfer tool enables you to create chamfers on the sketch.

This option will cause dimensions to be placed representing the chamfer.

Panel Bar

2D Chamfer Dialog Box

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching78

Page 89: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

This option will constrain secondary chamfers by referencing dimension parameters from the first chamfer created during this session of the Chamfer tool.

Distance: Enter a distance for the chamfer to be applied equally to both sides.

Distance1: Enter a value for one side of the chamfer.

Distance2: Enter a value for the second side of the chamfer.

Distance: Enter a value for one side of the chamfer.

Angle: Enter a value for the angle of the chamfer.

Process Overview - Creating ChamfersThe following steps represent an overview for creating chamfers in your sketch.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Chamfer tool.2. In the 2D Chamfer dialog box, adjust the options as required and select a point to

chamfer or select the two entities separately.

79Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 90: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. If necessary, change the options in the dialog box and continue selecting points or geometry to create additional chamfers.

4. When you are finished adding chamfers, in the 2D Chamfer dialog box, click Done.

Creating CenterlinesYou cannot draw centerlines. Instead, you can draw regular line segments using the standard Line tool. You then change the line segment to represent a centerline style. Using centerlines in your sketch will assist in creating revolve features and placing diametric profile dimensions.

Process Overview - Creating CenterlinesThe following steps represent an overview for creating centerlines in your sketch.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Line tool and draw a standard line segment where the centerline will be.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching80

Page 91: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2. Select the line segment and on the Standard toolbar, from the Styles drop-down list, select Centerline.

The selected line will be converted to a centerline style.

The centerline can now be used to place diametric profile dimensions.

81Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 92: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Rules for Creating SketchesPrincipleCreating sketch geometry is as easy as drawing a closed shape using Autodesk Inventor Sketch tools. There are several ways to create closed shapes. You can use tools such as the rectangle, circle, or polygon or you can constrain sketch geometry so that separate sketch elements come together to create a closed shape. There will be times when you need to create sketch geometry that is not closed, for example a path for a sweep feature or to create a surface. This lesson focuses on creating closed profiles.

Following are some rules for successful sketching:

• Keep the sketch simple. Do not fillet the corners of a sketch if you can apply a fillet to the edges of the finished 3D feature and achieve the same effect. Complex sketch geometry can be difficult to manage as designs evolve.

• Repeat simple shapes to build more complex shapes.

• Draw the profile sketch roughly to size and shape.

• Accept default dimensions until the shape is stabilized.

• Use 2D constraints to stabilize sketch shape before size.

• Use closed loops for profiles.

Creating Sketches - Example

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching82

Page 93: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Sketch Coordinate SystemPrincipleEach sketch you create has its own independent coordinate system. This coordinate system is based upon the location and method you use when you create the sketch and is completely independent from the 3D part model's coordinate system.

In most cases, you will not need to edit the sketch coordinates but if required, you can right-click the sketch in the browser and on the shortcut menu, click Edit Coordinate System. You must exit the sketch before you edit the coordinate system so you can change the orientation of the axes and reposition the origin.

Editing the Sketch Coordinate SystemThe following steps represent an overview for editing the Sketch Coordinate System.

1. In the event you need to edit the sketch coordinate system, exit the sketch and in the Browser, right-click the sketch and click Edit Coordinate System on the shortcut menu.

The sketch coordinate icon appears, showing its current origin and orientation.

Independent Sketch Coordinates

83Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 94: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2. To change the sketch coordinate's origin, select the origin of sketch coordinate icon, and then select a new point for the origin.

3. The change the direction of the X or Y axis, click the axis then select a new edge to align the axis to.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching84

Page 95: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Precise InputProcedureWhen creating sketch geometry it is possible to use the Precise Input toolbar to enter precise values or coordinates. This enables you to create sketch geometry at specific lengths or angles prior to placing parametric dimensions. It is also possible to use this tool to create sketch geometry based on relative coordinates from other model geometry.

Access MethodsUse the following method to access the Precise Input tool:

Relative Origin: This option enables you to enter coordinates relative to a point you select.

Relative Orientation: This option is used when moving faces on a base solid. It will rotate the axes of the active coordinate system. Relative Orientation is not available while sketching.

Delta Input: This option sets the inputs as a delta to the last point picked or entered. The first point is relative to the origin. Subsequent points are relative to the last point picked or entered.

Input Type: From the drop-down list, select a data format.

XY: This format specifies a coordinate relative to the origin. In the X and Y boxes, enter the desired values.

X°: This format specifies a coordinate by x coordinate and angle from the positive X axis. In the X and ° boxes, enter the desired values.

Y°: This format specifies a coordinate by y coordinate and angle from the positive X axis. In the Y and ° boxes, enter the desired values.

Toolbar View menu > Toolbars > Inventor Precise Input

Precise Input Toolbar

85Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 96: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

d°: This format specifies a coordinate by a distance and angle from the positive X axis. In the D and ° boxes, enter the desired values.

Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for using the Precise Input tool.

1. Create a new sketch.

2. On the View menu, click Toolbars > Inventor Precise Input to display the Inventor Precise Input toolbar.

3. On the 2D Sketch Panel Bar, click a sketch tool such as Line.4. To set your relative Precise Relative point, click the icon and pick a point on the

sketch geometry. (Optionally enter offset values for the selected point.)

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching86

Page 97: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The point is previewed. Click to accept the position.

5. Click the Delta X Delta Y button to move the origin indicator to the last point. From the Input Type drop-down list, select the desired Input Type and enter the appropriate values in the corresponding boxes.

The point is previewed. Click to accept the point.

6. Continue to enter additional input values as required.

87Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 98: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The point is previewed. Click to accept the point.

7. Continue to enter additional input values as required.

The point is previewed. Click to accept the point.

8. Right-click in the graphics window and click done on the shortcut menu.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching88

Page 99: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing SketchesProcedureAs you build your parametric model, you will be creating multiple sketches. When the sketch is used by a feature such as Extrude, Revolve, or Hole, the sketch becomes consumed by the feature and appears under the feature in the Browser. You can see each of the sketches in the Browser by expanding the particular feature(s). The ability to edit these features is fundamental to any parametric modeling session. As you edit the sketches, the changes are applied to the features based upon those sketches.

In this lesson you learn how to edit sketches.

Access MethodsThe following methods can be used to edit sketches.

In the image below, Sketch1 has been consumed by Extrusion1. You can expand the Extrusion1 feature to expose the consumed sketch.

Editing the sketch places the model in a rolled back state, where only the features existing at the time this sketch was created are visible. Note the change in appearance in the browser as the background color changes indicating the active feature.

When you edit sketches, you are returned to the sketch environment and the Panel Bar changes, providing you with access to all the sketch tools initially used in creating the sketch.

Browser Double-click the sketch.

Browser Right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch.

Browser Right-click the sketch and click Edit Sketch.

89Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 100: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

On the Standard toolbar, click the Return tool to exit the sketch environment.

Editing Sketches

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching90

Page 101: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for editing sketches.

1. In the Browser, right-click the feature or sketch and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu.

Once the sketch has been activated for editing, you can make changes to geometry, dimensions, and constraints.

91Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 102: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2. Continue to make edits to the sketch as required.

3. When you are done editing the sketch, on the Standard toolbar, click the Return tool to exit the sketch and return to the part model. The changes in the sketch are applied to the 3D features of the part.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching92

Page 103: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Sketch DoctorProcedureThe Sketch Doctor is a tool that assists you in fixing common problems that can occur in your sketches. Common problems include redundant points, missing coincident constraints, and open loops.

In this lesson you learn how to use the Sketch Doctor to fix common problems in sketches.

Access MethodsThe following methods can be used to access the Sketch Doctor.

In the Extrude dialog box, the presence of the Red Cross icon indicates that problems have been detected with the sketch. You click this button to start the Sketch Doctor, which will diagnose and assist you in fixing the problems detected. The Sketch Doctor can correct some problems, while other problems may require manual editing and correction.

Sketched Feature Dialog Box This icon is available in the Sketched Feature dialog box if a problem with the sketch is detected.

Browser While a sketch is activated, right-click and click Sketch Doctor.

Extrude Dialog Box - Sketch Problems Detected

93Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 104: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In the Sketch Doctor dialog box, click Diagnose Sketch to start the diagnosis.

In the Diagnose Sketch dialog box, you select the diagnostic tests to perform. By default, all tests are selected.

Detected problems are listed in the Sketch Doctor dialog box. You select the problem to recover and click Next.

Sketch Doctor Dialog Box

Diagnose Sketch Dialog Box

Sketch Doctor Dialog Box

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching94

Page 105: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

A problem diagnosis/description is displayed. Information about potential fixes is included.

You select the appropriate treatment option and click Finish.

Sketch Doctor Dialog Box

Sketch Doctor Dialog Box

Tip

Sketch ProblemsMost sketch problems occur when you import 2D geometry from other applications. Read the import options closely while importing geometry, and import only the geometry required for the sketch.

95Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 106: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Creating SketchesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create some basic sketch geometry use the sketch to create 3D features.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching, click Exercise: Creating Sketches

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

3D Part Created Using Sketches

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching96

Page 107: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Constraining SketchesOverview

Overview

OverviewYou use geometric constraints to control the sketch geometry to which they have been applied. For example, a vertical constraint, applied to a line segment, forces that line segment to always be vertical. A tangent constraint added to an arc forces that arc to remain tangent to the geometry that it has been constrained.

In this lesson you learn how to work with constraint sketches.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Understand the concept of constraining sketches

• Understand geometric constraints

• Understand how to plan constraints

• Show and delete constraints applied to 2D sketch geometry

• Use the Show All tool to show all constraints applied to a sketch

• Create and use construction geometry in the sketch

2D Constraints on Part Sketch

97Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 108: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Constraining Sketches in Autodesk InventorPrincipleWhen you add constraints to 2D geometry, you are adding a level of intelligence to the 2D geometry. Constraints stabilize sketch geometry by placing limits on how the geometry can change as the result of constraint dragging, or dimensions. For example, if a horizontal constraint is applied to a line, that line is forced to be horizontal at all times.

As you create sketches, some constraints are inferred (applied automatically). In most cases the inferred constraints are sufficient for your initial constraints. As you continue to develop the sketch, you may need to add additional constraints to properly stabilize the sketch geometry.

The following image illustrates the effect of constraints on sketch geometry. The sketch on the left was purposely drawn utilizing only some of the inferred constraints. The sketch on the right is the result of adding additional constraints such as vertical, horizontal, and colinear.

Sketch Before and After Constraining

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching98

Page 109: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Geometric ConstraintsProcedure

Geometric ConstraintsYou can apply several different types of geometric constraints to your sketch geometry. Each constraint type offers a unique capability and is used to create a specific constraint condition.

In this lesson you learn about the different constraints available and how they can be used.

Access MethodsThe following methods can be used to access the 2D geometric constraints.

The following image shows the 2D geometric constraints available from the 2D Sketch Panel.

2D Sketch Panel

Shortcut Menu In the graphics window, right-click and click Create Constraint.

Available Geometric Constraints

Constraint Potential Sketch Elements

Constraint Condition Created

Line Constrained geometry is perpendicular to each other

99Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 110: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Line Constrained geometry is parallel to each other

Line, Circle, Arc Constrained geometry is tangent to each other

Line, Point, Endpoint of Line, Center Point

Constrains two points together; Can constraint a line to a point

Circle, Arc Constrains circles or arcs to share the same center point location

Lines, Ellipse Axes Constrains the geometry to lie along the same line

Lines, Pairs of Points (including Midpoints)

Constrains the geometry to lie parallel to the X axis of the sketch coordinate system

Lines, Pairs of Points (including Midpoints)

Constrains the geometry to lie parallel to the Y axis of the sketch coordinate system

Lines, Circles, Arcs Constrains the geometry to have equal radii or lines to have the same length

Lines, Points, Circles, Arcs Constrains the geometry to fixed at its current position relative to the sketch coordinate system

Lines, Points, Circles, Arcs Constrains geometry to be symmetrical about a selected centerline

Constraint Potential Sketch Elements

Constraint Condition Created

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching100

Page 111: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Applying Constraints - Process OverviewThe following steps present an overview to applying different types of geometric constraints. In the exercise portion of this lesson, you have an opportunity to place additional types of constraints.

Apply a Horizontal Constraint

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Horizontal constraint tool and select the geometry to be constrained.

Apply an Equal Constraint

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Equal constraint tool.2. Select a circle, line, or arc.

3. Select the circle, line, or arc to apply the Equal constraint.

4. The selected geometry is now constrained to be Equal in size.

Apply a Horizontal Constraint between a point and a midpoint

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Horizontal constraint tool.

101Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 112: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2. Select a point such as the endpoint of a line or center of a circle.

3. Select the midpoint of an existing line.

The geometry is now constrained horizontally based upon the two points selected.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching102

Page 113: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Apply a Symmetrical Constraint

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Symmetric constraint tool.2. Select the first sketch element for the constraint.

3. Select the second sketch element for the constraint.

4. Select a sketch element to be used for the symmetry line. Tip: You only need to select the symmetry line once during the current session of the Symmetric Constraint tool.

5. Continue selecting other sketch elements to apply the Symmetric constraint.

103Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 114: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Planning ConstraintsConceptAs you create sketch geometry, constraints are automatically applied. However, those constraints do not always completely represent your design intent. Therefore, you must add constraints or delete existing constraints.

In this lesson you learn how to plan constraints for your 2D sketch geometry.

Following are some key concepts regarding constraint planning.

• Determine sketch dependencies. During the sketch creation process, determine how sketch elements relate to each other and apply the appropriate sketch constraints.

• Analyze automatically applied constraints. As you create sketch geometry, some constraints are automatically applied. After the sketch is created, you should determine whether any degrees of freedom remain on the sketch. If required, delete the automatically applied constraints and apply constraints to remove the degrees of freedom.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching104

Page 115: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Use only needed constraints. When you apply constraints to your sketch geometry, take into account the design intent and the degrees of freedom remaining on the sketch. It is not necessary to fully constrain sketch geometry in order to create 3D features. In some situations you may be required to leave sketch geometry underconstrained. You can use the constraint-drag technique to see the remaining degrees of freedom on the sketch.

• Stabilize shape before size. Before you place dimensions on your sketch elements, you should constrain the sketch to prevent the geometry from distorting. As you place the parametric dimensions, the sketch elements update to reflect the correct size. By stabilizing the geometry with constraints, you will be able to predict the effect the dimensions will have on the sketch geometry. If necessary use the Fix constraint to fix portions of the sketch.

105Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 116: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Place dimensions on large elements before small ones. By placing dimensions on larger elements first, you can minimize distortion on the sketch as it updates to reflect the dimensioned values.

• Use both geometric constraints and dimensions. It is important to understand that constraints and dimensions work together to constrain the geometry. Some constraint combinations may distort underconstrained portions of your sketch. By using a combination of geometric constraints and parametric dimensions, you can correct this distortion and generate a sketch that is properly constrained and meets your design intent.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching106

Page 117: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Identify sketch elements that might change size. When constraining sketches, take into account features that may change as the design evolves. When you identify sketch features that may change, leave those features underconstrained. This will allow the feature to change as the design evolves. In the case of adaptive parts, you will intentionally leave features underconstrained to enable them to adapt to other parts in the assembly.

107Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 118: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Showing and Deleting ConstraintsProcedureAs you create and constrain your 2D sketches, you may need to view and possibly delete some constraints. The Show Constraints tool enables you to view the constraints applied to the selected geometry and if necessary, select the constraint(s) and delete them.

Access MethodsThe following method can be used to access the Show/Delete Constraints tool.

Viewing Constraints. On the Show Constraints toolbar, click the constraint. The geometry referenced by the selected constraint will be highlighted.

Deleting Constraints. On the Show Constraints toolbar, select the constraint symbol and press DELETE, or right-click the selected constraint and click Delete.

Lock the Constraint Toolbar. Click the PushPin icon on the Show Constraints toolbar to leave the toolbar displayed until you close it.

2D Sketch Panel

Show/Delete Constraints Toolbar

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching108

Page 119: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Process OverviewThe following steps present an overview for using the Show/Delete Constraints tool.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Show Constraints tool.2. Pause over, or select the geometry. Pausing over the geometry will display the

Show Constraints toolbar temporarily until you move your cursor away from the toolbar. Selecting the geometry will display the toolbar permanently until you close it. You can lock the temporary toolbar by selecting the PushPin icon.

3. Select the constraint symbol to view the geometry referenced by the constraint.

4. To delete the constraint, press DELETE, or right-click the constraint symbol and click Delete.

Show Constraints Toolbar - Temporary Mode

Show Constraints Toolbar - Locked Mode

109Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 120: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Show All ConstraintsProcedureThe Show All Constraints tool enables you to see all constraints applied to the active sketch geometry. When you select the Show All Constraints tool, Show/Delete Constraint toolbars are displayed next to each sketch element. Pause over or select the constraint symbol to highlight the constrained geometry. Select the constraint symbol and press DELETE to delete the constraint.

Access MethodsThe following methods can be used to access the Show All Constraints tool.

The Constraint toolbars will appear next to each sketch element. Click and drag on the vertical bars of the toolbars to move them to another location.

Shortcut Menu Right-click in the graphics window and click Show All Constraints. (Sketch must be active.)

Keyboard Shortcut F8 - Show all constraints

F9 - Hide all constraints

Sketch Showing All Constraints

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching110

Page 121: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Use Construction Geometry in the SketchConceptThere may be times when you need to place geometry in your sketch that you do not want to be included in the 3D feature. To do this, you create, constrain, and dimension construction geometry just like any other 2D sketch geometry but when a 3D feature is created, the construction geometry is ignored.

You can use construction geometry as a reference for dimensions to other normal sketch geometry as well as to constrain normal sketch geometry.

In this lesson you learn how to create and constrain construction geometry.

Access MethodsUse the following method to access the Construction geometry style.

In the following image below, construction lines are used to position the slot from the center of the circle and along the angled construction line.

Process Overview - Creating Construction GeometryThe following steps present an overview for creating construction geometry.

1. Create a new sketch or activate an existing sketch.

Standard Toolbar

Sketch Containing Construction Geometry

111Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 122: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2. On the Standard toolbar, select Construction from the Styles drop-down list.

3. On the Sketch Panel Bar, click one of the sketch tools to create the geometry.As you sketch the geometry it will be created as construction geometry.

4. To switch back to normal geometry creation, on the Standard toolbar, select Normal from the Styles drop-down list.

5. Continue sketching geometry as required.

6. Constrain and dimension the geometry as required.

Tip

Converting Normal Geometry to Construction GeometryYou can convert normal geometry to construction geometry by selecting the geometry, then on the Standard Toolbar in the Styles drop-down list, select Construction.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching112

Page 123: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Constraining SketchesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create and constrain sketch geometry. Using the concepts and procedures learned in this lesson, you create and constrain both normal and construction geometry. Sketched features are used in this exercise. More information on these features is presented in the next chapter.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching, click Exercise: Constraining Sketches

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Simple Part with Constrained Sketches

113Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 124: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Dimensioning SketchesOverview

Overview

OverviewDimensioning your sketches is a major part of constraining the 2D geometry. While geometric constraints stabilize the sketch and make it predictable, dimensions size the sketch according to your design intent.

In this lesson you learn how to create and use various types of dimensions on your 2D sketch geometry.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create various types of parametric dimensions

• Create and use driven dimensions on your sketch

• Use additional options when applying dimensions

• Create and apply dimensions to your sketch using the Automatic Dimensioning tool

• Use different formats when displaying dimensions on your sketch

• Understand best practices for dimensioning your sketch

3D Part with Parametric Dimensions

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching114

Page 125: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Parametric DimensionsProcedureAdding parametric dimensions is the final step in fully constraining your sketch geometry. When you apply a parametric dimension to a sketch element, the sketch element changes size to reflect the value of the dimension.

Unlike 2D CAD applications where dimensions are simply numeric representations of the size of the geometry, in a parametric 3D modeling application, dimensions are used to drive the size of the geometry. This technology enables you to quickly change a dimension and immediately see the effect the change has on the geometry.

Several types of parametric dimensions are available but only one dimension tool is used to create them. Autodesk Inventor places the appropriate type of dimension based on the geometry that you select. When placing dimensions, the shortcut menu displays additional options for placing the dimension.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the General Dimension tool:

The following image shows various types of dimensions that you can apply to sketch geometry.

Standard Toolbar

Keyboard Shortcut D

Sketch Elements with Various Dimensions

115Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 126: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Process Overview - Applying Parametric DimensionsThis section presents the processes for applying different types of parametric dimensions.

Linear Dimension:a. On the Panel Bar, click the General Dimension tool.

b. Select the sketch element for the linear dimension and follow the sequence

below.

c. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or

continue placing additional dimensions.

Radial/Diameter Dimension:a. On the Panel Bar, click the General Dimension tool.

b. Select the sketch element for the radial/diameter dimension and follow the

sequence below.

c. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or

continue placing additional dimensions.

Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value

Geometry changes to reflect new dimension

Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value

Geometry changes to reflect new dimension

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching116

Page 127: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Angular Dimension:a. On the Panel Bar, click the General Dimension tool.

b. Select the sketch each element for the angular dimension and follow the

sequence below.

c. When creating an angular dimension select each line at a point on other than

their endpoints.

d. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or

continue placing additional dimensions.

Aligned Dimension:a. On the Panel Bar, click the General Dimension tool.

b. Select the sketch element for the aligned dimension and follow the sequence

below.

c. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or

continue placing additional dimensions.

Tip: You could also right-click before positioning the dimension and click Aligned on the shortcut menu to set the dimension type as an Aligned dimension.

Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value

Geometry changes to reflect new dimension

Position the cursor near the geometry.

Click when the Aligned

Dimension icon is displayed

Place the dimension

Select the dimension and

enter a new value

Geometry changes to reflect new

dimension

117Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 128: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Entering ValuesAutodesk Inventor understands specific units of measurement such as millimeter, centimeter, meter, inch, and foot. It is not necessary to enter the suffix of the default unit.

If your part consists of multiple units of measurement you must enter the non-default unit suffixes. For example, if the default unit of measurement is millimeters, you would enter a value of 50 millimeters as 50 with no suffix. To specify a value of 50 centimeters in the same part, you would enter 50 cm.

Autodesk Inventor evaluates the values as you enter them. Values shown in red indicate an improper value or format, while values shown in black are considered to be valid.

Unit suffixes and parameters are case-sensitive. When you enter a unit suffix, it must be entered in lowercase. For example 50 cm would be evaluated correctly while 50 CM is not valid.

Additional Dimension OptionsThe following list represents additional options available on the shortcut menu when you place dimensions.

• Display Edit Dimension dialog box automatically: While placing a dimension, right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu, click Edit Dimension. With this option set, the Edit Dimension dialog box will appear automatically after each dimension is placed.

• Radial/Diameter dimension options: When you place a dimension on a arc or circle, right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu, click Diameter or Radius to switch the default mode of the current dimension. When dimensioning an arc, the default mode is Radius. When dimensioning a circle, the default mode is Diameter.

• Linear dimension options: When you place a linear dimension to a line or

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching118

Page 129: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

two points at an angle, right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu, click the desired dimension type.

• Dimensioning to quadrants: When you need to place a dimension to the quadrant of a circle, place the cursor near the quadrant and look for the quadrant dimension glyph. Select the arc or circle at the point where the glyph appears.

Dimensions Stored as ParametersEach dimension you create is automatically named and stored as a parameter in the current part file. Selecting the Parameters tool will display the Parameters dialog box listing the Model Parameters.

Notice the parameter names d3, d4, d5 and so on. These names are automatically generated each time a dimension is placed. If you delete a dimension, its parameter is also deleted and the original dimension name is not used again in the current part file. You can rename the default dimension names and modify their values in the Parameters dialog box.

Dimensions Listed as Model Parameters

119Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 130: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Driven DimensionsPrincipleAs you apply dimensions to your sketch geometry, these dimensions will be parametric by default. Each parametric dimension you apply reduces the degrees of freedom available on each sketch. Once all the degrees of freedom have been removed, the sketch is considered fully constrained and you are not allowed to place any additional constraints or parametric dimensions.

You create driven dimensions with the same dimension tool used for parametric dimensions. However, when you create a driven dimension, you must set the dimension style to Driven. On the Standard toolbar, from the Styles drop-down list, select Driven. This option is available only if the General Dimension tool is active or one or more existing dimensions are currently selected.

Unlike parametric dimensions which force the geometry to change size based on the dimension value, driven dimensions are driven by the geometry. The value of a driven dimension changes if the geometry it has been applied to changes. Because driven dimensions do not force the geometry to change, they do not remove any degrees of freedom from the sketch.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the General Dimension tool and apply driven dimensions.

Standard Toolbar

Keyboard Shortcut D

Fully Constrained Sketch Containing a Driven Dimension

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching120

Page 131: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Additional Options for Applying DimensionsProcedureWhen you apply dimensions to your sketch elements, additional options such as tolerances, are available, enabling you to control the display of the dimensions. Also available are tools designed to assist you in creating dimensions referenced from other features and/or dimensions.

Referencing Other DimensionsWhen you create a new dimension, you can reference an existing dimension by selecting the dimension in the graphics window. The dimension parameter name is automatically entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box.

The preceding image shows dimension d25 being created equal to dimension d24. When you want to reference other dimensions in a new dimension, with the Edit Dimension dialog box open, select an existing dimension to reference. The cursor

Note

Automatic Driven DimensionsAs you place dimensions on your sketch, if you attempt to apply a dimension that would overconstrain the sketch, you will be given the option to create the dimension as a driven dimension. Click Accept to create a driven dimension based on your selection.

121Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 132: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

changes to indicate that you are referencing an existing dimension. When you select the existing dimension, the parameter name of the dimension you selected is entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box.

Edit Dimension Dialog Box - Flyout OptionsWhen applying parametric dimensions, the following options are available on the Edit Dimension flyout.

Measure: Enables you to measure another sketch element or 3D feature. The resulting value is placed in the Edit Dimension dialog box.

Show Dimensions: Enables you to select a feature on the 3D part to display the underlying dimensions. After the dimensions are displayed you can select a dimension for use in the existing dimension. The dimension being referenced can be used alone or in a formula.

Tolerance: Displays the Tolerance dialog box enabling you to assign a tolerance to the parametric dimension.

List Parameters: Lists the current User Parameters in a window, enabling you to select a User Parameter for use in the current dimension. This option appears only if User Parameters have been created.

Recently Used Values: Displays a list of recently used values. Select any value for use in the current dimension.

Edit Dimension Flyout

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching122

Page 133: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Automatic DimensioningProcedureThe Auto Dimension tool applies constraints and dimensions to the entire sketch or only those sketch elements that are selected. The Auto Dimension tool is intended to be used in conjunction with the General Dimension tool and manually added or inferred constraints.

For best results you should apply constraints and any dimensions you would prefer not be automatically calculated. Although you can use the tool to dimension all sketch elements automatically by not selecting any elements and clicking the Apply button, you should select the geometry based on how you want the automatic dimensions applied.

Access MethodsUse the following method to access the Auto Dimension tool.

The following options are available in the Auto Dimension dialog box:

Curves: Select the sketch elements to be automatically dimensioned. If no sketch elements are selected, all elements are considered for dimensioning.

Dimensions: When selected, applies dimensions to the sketch elements.

Constraints: When selected, applies constraints to the sketch elements.

Dimensions Required: Displays the number of dimensions required to fully constrain the sketch. Manually applied dimensions and/or constraints will affect this number. Tip: When this number is 2, consider using at least one fix constraint or constrain the geometry to the origin of the sketch.

Apply: Applies dimensions and constraints to the selected geometry.

Remove: Removes the dimensions and/or constraints applied by the Auto Dimension tool. This will not remove dimensions and/or constraints that you applied manually.

Standard Toolbar

Auto Dimension Dialog Box

123Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 134: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Done: Closes the dialog box.

Process Overview - Automatic DimensioningThe following steps represent an overview for using the Auto Dimension tool.

1. Create a new sketch and add the constraints and dimensions that you prefer not be automatically calculated. Notice the constraints that have been added manually. This ensures that critical constraints do not need to be automatically calculated.

2. On the Panel Bar, click the Auto Dimension tool and select the geometry to be automatically dimensioned.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching124

Page 135: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. In the Auto Dimension dialog box, click the Apply button to apply dimensions and constraints to the selected geometry. Click Done to close the dialog box.

4. Move the dimensions as required to clean up the automatic placement.

5. Use standard dimension editing techniques to adjust the dimension values as required.

125Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 136: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Displaying DimensionsProcedureYou can control how dimensions are displayed in the graphics window by using different dimension display options. While in an active sketch, right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu, click Dimension Display. You then select a dimension display option.

The following options are available on the Dimension Display submenu:

Value: Dimension is displayed as nominal value.

Name: Dimension is displayed as a parameter name.

Expression: Dimension is displayed as an expression.

Dimension Display Options

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching126

Page 137: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Tolerance: Dimension is displayed with tolerance values.

Precise Value: Dimension is displayed as precise value regardless of precision setting.

Guidelines for Dimensioning SketchesPrincipleConsider the following guidelines when adding dimensions to your sketch:

• Use the General Dimension tool to place critical dimensions, and then use the Auto Dimension tool to speed up the dimensioning process.

• Use geometric constraints when possible. For example, place a perpendicular constraint instead of an angle dimension of 90 degrees.

• Place large dimensions before small ones.

• Incorporate relationships between dimensions. For example, if two dimensions are supposed to be the same value, reference one dimension to the other. With this relationship, if the first dimension changes, the other dimension changes as well.

• Consider both dimensional and geometric constraints to meet the overall design intent.

127Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 138: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Dimensioning SketchesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you apply dimensions to a sketch. Using the techniques learned in this lesson, apply a combination of parametric and driven dimensions to the sketch geometry.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching, click Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

3D Part with Parametric Dimensions

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching128

Page 139: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Challenge Exercise: Introduction to SketchingChallenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching

Print Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create a new part file and using the techniques and concepts learned in this chapter, create, constrain, and dimension a sketch as show here.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching, click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Fully Constrained and Dimensioned Sketch

129Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 140: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter SummarySummary

SummaryYou learned the following in this chapter:

• Basic rules for creating sketches.

• How to create and edit 2D sketches.

• Fix common problems associated with sketches.

• How to constrain 2D sketches in Autodesk Inventor.

• About the types of constraints available and what types of geometry they can be applied to.

• How to use construction geometry when creating 2D sketches.

• How to apply parametric dimension to 2D sketches.

• What makes parametric and driven dimensions different.

• How to display dimensions

• Guidelines and best practices for dimensioning sketches.

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching130

Page 141: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In this chapterAfter completing this chapter, you will be able to...

• Create sketches and profiles for use in sketch features.

• Use the Sketch tool to create new sketches.

• Use existing part faces to define new sketch planes.

• Create reference geometry from existing part geometry.

• Create extruded features using the Extrude tool.

• Specify termination options when you create extruded features.

• Edit extruded features.

• Create revolved features using the Revolve tool.

• Edit revolved features.

Creating Simple Sketched Features

Chapter IntroductionIn this chapter you learn about...

• Sketched features.

• Base and secondary features.

• Consumed and unconsumed sketches.

• Creating profiles containing multiple closed loops.

• Sharing sketch geometry.

• Creating sketch planes.

• Using part faces to define a sketch

• Application options that enable you to automatically project edges on a new sketch.

• Using the Extrude tool to create extruded features.

• The Join, Cut, and Intersect feature relationships.

• Specifying different termination options for extrude features

• Editing features after you have created them.

• Using the Revolve tool to create revolved features.

Page 142: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

1

Introduction to Sketched FeaturesOverview

Overview

OverviewThree-dimensional (3D) features that you create in Autodesk Inventor fall into one of two categories: sketched features or placed features. The term "sketched feature" refers to a 3D feature that is based on a 2D sketch.

In this lesson you learn the concept of sketched features and how they are created.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Understand the concept of simple sketched features

• Identify consumed and unconsumed sketches in your model

• Identify the two different types of profiles and options for working with closed loop profiles

• Share sketch features

Part Created Using a Single Shared Sketch

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features32

Page 143: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Simple Sketched FeaturesSimple Sketched Features - ConceptAs the name implies, sketched features are 3D features that are created from an existing 2D sketch. These features serve as the basis for most of your designs using Autodesk Inventor. When you create a sketched feature, you begin by first creating the sketch or profile for the 3D feature. For simple sketched features, this profile usually represents a 2D section of the 3D feature being created. For more complex sketched features, multiple sketches can be created and used within one sketch feature.

You create your 3D model by using multiple sketches representing various profiles of the 3D part and building on those sketches with sketch features. The first sketch feature you create is considered the base feature. After you create the base feature, additional sketched and/or placed features are added to the 3D model. As you add the additional sketched features, options are available that control whether the secondary sketched features will add or remove material from the existing 3D geometry.

Typical Sketched Feature CreationThe image below represents a typical workflow for creating a 3D part based upon sketched features. The base sketch is created which is used to create the base feature. Secondary sketches and features are then added to the 3D model.

Sketched Feature AttributesThe key attributes of sketched features are as follows:

• Requires an unconsumed sketch.

• Used for both base and secondary features.

• The result of the sketched feature can add or remove mass from the 3D geometry.

Creation of Sketched Features

133Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 144: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Consumed and Unconsumed SketchesWhen you create a new part, the initial sketch is created for you automatically. In most cases you use this default sketch for the basis of your 3D geometry. After the sketch is created, you create a sketched feature, such as Extrude or Revolve, to create 3D geometry from the initial sketch. When you create the 3D sketched feature, the sketch itself becomes consumed by the 3D sketched feature. Prior to this time, the sketch is considered unconsumed and can be used for any sketched feature.

Unconsumed SketchThe image below shows the initial sketch before it is consumed by the sketched feature.

Consumed SketchesThe following image shows sketches consumed by the sketched features. In the browser, the sketches are nested below the sketched feature in which they were used.

Unconsumed Sketch

Consumed Sketches

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features134

Page 145: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Options for Consumed SketchesAfter the sketch has been consumed, you still have access to the sketch for editing and other operations. In the browser, right-click on the sketch to access these options.

The following options are available on the Sketch shortcut menu:

Edit Sketch: Activates the sketch environment for editing. Any changes you make to the sketch are reflected in the 3D geometry.

Redefine: Enables you to redefine the plane on which the sketch was created. Any changes you make are reflected in the 3D geometry.

Share Sketch: Shares the sketch making it available for additional sketch features.

Edit Coordinate System: Activates the sketch enabling you to adjust the sketch coordinate system. For example, you could change the direction of the current X or Y axes, or reposition the sketch origin.

Create Note: Attaches a note to the sketch using the Engineer's Notebook interface.

Visibility: When a sketch is consumed by a feature, its visibility is automatically turned off. This option sets the visibility of the sketch to On.

Sketch Shortcut Menu

135Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 146: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Sketches and ProfilesConceptWhen you create sketches it is possible to create sketch geometry that contains multiple profiles. There are two different types of profiles: open and closed. Closed profiles are the most common and are used to create 3D geometry. Open profiles are used to create paths and surfaces and can also appear as the result of projecting reference geometry.

As you build more complex sketches, you may end up with multiple closed loop profiles. In this situation you have one sketch containing multiple closed profiles. The closed profiles in some cases may intersect each other. When you create sketched features from these types of profiles, you are able to select any individual closed profile or multiple closed profiles to be included in the feature.

Multiple Closed Loop ProfilesIn the following image, a sketch containing multiple closed loop profiles is used to create an extruded feature. In the bottom image, note the ability to select only the profiles you want included in the sketched feature.

Sketch Containing Multiple Closed Loop Profiles

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features136

Page 147: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Sharing Sketch FeaturesSharing Sketch Features - ProcedureYou can reuse an existing sketch after it as been consumed by the sketched feature--this is referred to as sharing a sketch. If your sketch contains geometry that is meant to define separate features on the part, you can share the sketch thereby making it available for additional sketched features.

Under certain circumstances, sharing the sketch is an alternative to creating multiple sketches. When you share the sketch its geometry becomes available for an unlimited number of additional sketched features.

Access MethodsUse the following method to share a sketch.

Shortcut Menu In the Browser, right-click on a consumed sketch and click Share Sketch.

Shortcut Menu - Share Sketch

137Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 148: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The following image shows a sketch that has been shared and is being used in two sketched features.

• The hand indicates the sketch has been shared.

• The icon is colored indicating that the sketch (and any dimensions added) will remain visible, even after being consumed by the sketched feature.

• You must manually turn off visibility for a shared sketch.

Part/Assembly Browser - Shared Sketch

Tip

Share with Caution!Before you share a sketch, be certain this is the method you want to use to accomplish your design intent. After you share a sketch, there is no way to "un-share" or delete the shared sketch.

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features138

Page 149: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Introduction to Sketched FeaturesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create some simple sketched features from a sketch consisting of multiple closed loop profiles. You then share the sketch to make it available for additional features.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features, click Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Part Created Using a Single Shared Sketch

139Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 150: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Working with Sketch PlanesOverview

Overview

OverviewEvery sketch you create defines a 2D plane on which your sketch geometry is created. In this lesson you learn how to work with sketch planes, and you learn about creating and referencing sketch geometry.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Use the Sketch tool to create new sketch planes

• Define a new sketch plane based upon an existing part face

• Reference existing model edge geometry when you create sketches

• Create reference geometry

Completed Pillar Block

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features140

Page 151: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Sketch ToolProcedureYou use the Sketch tool to create new sketches or to activate existing sketches. When you select the Sketch tool on the Standard toolbar, you are prompted to select a plane to create a sketch or an existing sketch to edit. You can select planes or sketches in the graphics window or in the browser.

Using the Sketch ToolThe following examples show potential uses of the Sketch tool.

• Activate an existing sketch On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool and in the browser, select an existing sketch.

The existing sketch is activated for editing.

Standard Toolbar

141Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 152: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Create a new sketch On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool and select a plane or face on the part.

A new sketch is created, aligned to the selected face.

• To exit the sketch, use one of the following methods:

• On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool or

• On the Standard toolbar, click the Return button or,

• Right-click in the graphics window and click Finish Sketch on the shortcut menu.

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features142

Page 153: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using a Part Face to Define a SketchProcedureOne of the most common methods for creating new sketches is to use a part face to define your sketch plane. You can create new sketch planes on any flat surface of an existing part. Using this method, the new sketch plane can be created directly on the selected face or offset from the selected face to a specified distance.

Creating Sketch Planes on a Part FaceThe following examples demonstrate how to create sketch planes on a part face.

• Create a new sketch plane aligned to a selected face

Right-click on a face of the part click New Sketch on the shortcut menu.

The sketch plane is created on the selected face.

Standard Toolbar

Shortcut Menu Right-click on a part face and click New Sketch.

143Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 154: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Create a new sketch plane, offset from a selected face

1.On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool2.Click on the face and drag the sketch plane away from the selected face.An offset dialog box is displayed.

3.In the Offset dialog box, enter a value for the offset and click the green checkmark.

The sketch plane is created offset from the selected face at the distance you specified.

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features144

Page 155: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Direct Model Edge ReferencingProcedureDirect model edge referencing refers to a process in which you reference existing model edge geometry in the creation of new sketch geometry. When you create new sketch planes on existing model faces, the edges of the selected face are automatically projected onto the new sketch. This geometry is known as reference geometry. Without this reference geometry, it would be otherwise impossible to dimension or constrain new sketch geometry to existing features on the 3D part.

Uses for Direct Model Edge ReferencesFollowing are potential uses for edge references:

• For dimensions to new sketch geometry

• For relational constraints to new sketch geometry

• As the basis for new sketched features

Application Options - Sketch TabWhen you select the Autoproject Edges for Sketch Creation and Edit option on the Sketch tab in the Options dialog box, the edges of the selected face are projected onto the new sketch when you create a new sketch plane on an existing face.

Referencing Model Edge GeometryThe following examples demonstrate how to reference model edge geometry when creating new sketches.

• Create a new sketch on an existing part face. The edges of the existing part face

Options Dialog Box - Sketch Tab

145Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 156: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

are automatically projected onto the new sketch.

Create new sketch geometry and use the projected reference geometry for dimensions and/or constraints.

• Direct model edge referencing in the context of an assembly:

• Create a new sketch on a face of the active part.

On the Panel Bar, click the Project Geometry tool and select a face on another part in the assembly. The new sketch geometry is created by projected the edges of the selected face. Note the appearance of the Adaptive indicator. This icon indicates the feature is adaptive to the referenced part in the assembly. If the source geometry projected onto the new sketch changes, this feature will automatically update to reflect the changes. This concept is known as

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features146

Page 157: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Adaptivity and is covered in greater detail later in this course.

To demonstrate Adaptivity, the source geometry on the first part in the assembly has been modified. As a result, the projected geometry updates to reflect the changes in the source part.

147Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 158: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Reference GeometryProcedureYou cannot draw reference geometry. The only way to create it is by using the Project Geometry tool. When you select this tool, you are prompted to select geometry to project onto the current sketch plane. As you select the geometry, it is projected onto the current sketch plane and is created as reference geometry.

When you project geometry from the same part, it is always associative to the original source geometry. If the source geometry changes, the reference geometry will also change. If you project geometry from another part in the assembly, the geometry is associative only if the Cross Part Geometry Projection option is selected. This option is found on the Assembly tab in the Options dialog box. If this option is not selected, the reference geometry is still created, however, it is not associative to the original source geometry.

Adaptivity is beyond the scope of this chapter but is covered in greater detail later in this course.

Access MethodsYou can use the following tools to create reference geometry:

Reference Geometry AttributesFollowing are some key attributes for reference geometry:

• Can be used as the basis for dimensions to new sketch geometry

• Can be used to apply relational constraints to new sketch geometry

• Cannot be dimensioned

• Cannot be trimmed

• Can be mirrored

• Cannot be drawn; can only be created by using Project Geometry tool or by selecting the Autoproject Edges option

Panel Bar

Panel Bar

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features148

Page 159: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Application Options - Assembly TabWith the Enable Associative Edge/Loop Geometry Projection During In-Place Modeling option selected on the Assembly tab in the Options dialog box, projecting geometry from other parts in the assembly will create associative (adaptive) reference geometry.

Application Options - Sketch TabWhen the Autoproject Edges During Curve Creation option is selected, you can autoproject geometry by hovering the pointer over the geometry to be projected while sketching.

Applications Options Dialog Box - Assembly Tab

Application Options - Sketch Tab

149Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 160: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Sketching Shortcut MenuWhile sketching, right-click in the graphics window and click AutoProject on the shortcut menu. This will enable you to hover over geometry to automatically project onto the current sketch plane.

Creating Reference Geometry - Process OverviewThe following procedures represent an overview for creating reference geometry.

1. Create a new sketch on the existing part.

2. On the Panel Bar, click the Project Geometry tool and select the geometry to project onto the current sketch.

Shortcut Menu - AutoProject

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features150

Page 161: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

To autoproject geometry during curve creation:

1. Create a new sketch on the existing part.

2. Begin sketching the required geometry. Right-click in the graphics window and click AutoProject on the shortcut menu.

3. Hover over the geometry to project. It will be automatically projected to the current sketch plane.

4. Continue sketching the required geometry as required. Tip: You may consider turning off the AutoProject option until it is needed again. This will prevent the accidental projection of geometry while sketching over existing part features.

151Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 162: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Working with Sketch PlanesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create several sketched features based upon different sketch planes. For each sketch you will be required to create reference geometry and use direct model edge referencing.

Note: Some 3D features are used in this exercise that will be covered in greater depth later in the course.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features, click Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Completed Pillar Block

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features152

Page 163: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Extruded FeaturesOverview

Overview

OverviewOne of the most common sketched features is the extruded feature. As you create these features you can adjust the feature relationship options for Join, Cut, and Intersect. After the feature is created, you can also edit the underlying sketch profiles used in the extruded feature.

In this lesson you learn how to create extruded features using different termination options and how to edit the feature and profiles used to create them.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Understand extruded features and how to create them

• Use the Extrude tool to create extruded features

• Understand the concept of using the Join, Cut, and Intersect options when you create extruded features

• Use the various termination options when you create extruded features

• Edit extruded features and the profiles used to create them

Index Slide

153Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 164: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Overview of Extruded FeaturesProcedureAn extruded feature is a sketched feature in which a profile is extruded to a distance specified by a value or based upon different termination options. If the profile being extruded is closed, you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of the extrusion. If the profile being extruded is open, the extrusion will result in a surface.

Although it is possible to taper the faces of the extruded feature, the extrusion direction is always perpendicular to the sketch profile being used.

Examples of Simple Extruded ProfilesIn this example, the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded feature.

In this example, the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded feature with holes.

Example of Extruded Features

Example of Extruded Feature

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features154

Page 165: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Extrude ToolProcedureYou use the Extrude tool to create extruded features from existing sketch profiles. Considered a sketched feature, extrude features require an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available. If the sketch contains a single closed profile, that profile is selected automatically when you start the Extrude tool. If the sketch contains more than one profile, you are required to select the profiles to be included in the extruded feature.

Extrude Tool - Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Extrude tool.

The Extrude dialog box is opened when you start the Extrude tool.

The following features and options are available in the Extrude dialog box:

Profile: Click this button to select geometry to be included in the extrusion. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the extrusion feature.

Output: Specify the desired output option, Solid or Surface.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu

Extrude Dialog Box

155Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 166: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Direction: Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the extrusion in the desired direction.

Creating Extruded Features - Process OverviewFollowing is an overview of the process for creating extruded features.

1. Create a new sketch.

2. On the Panel Bar, click the Extrude tool. Adjust the options as required and click OK.

3. The extruded feature is created.

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features156

Page 167: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

4. Create additional sketch geometry.

5. On the Panel Bar, click the Extrude tool. Adjust the options as required and click OK.

6. The additional extruded feature is added to the part.

7. Create additional sketch geometry as required.

157Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 168: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

8. On the Panel Bar, click the Extrude tool. Adjust the options as required and click OK.

9. The additional extruded feature is added to the part.

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features158

Page 169: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect

ConceptWhen you create extruded features you have the ability to adjust feature relationship options to control the effect of the current feature on existing features. These options are not available for the first feature of the part.

The feature relationship options are available in the Extrude dialog box.

Join: This option joins the result of the extruded feature being created to existing part geometry. Using this option results in material being added to the existing part. Note the green preview indicating material is being added.

Cut: This option cuts the result of the extruded feature being created from the existing part. Using this option results in material being removed from the existing part. Note the red preview indicating material is being removed.

Dialog Box - Feature Relationship Options

159Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 170: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Intersect: This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features and the new feature. Note the blue preview indicating an Intersect relationship.

Specifying TerminationProcedureWhen you create extruded features, you can specify termination options for the feature in the Extrude dialog box. Depending on the option you choose, different interface options are available. Specifying termination options enables you to control where the feature starts and ends.

Distance: This option extrudes the profile according to the distance specified.

Extrude Dialog Box - Termination Options

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features160

Page 171: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

To Next: This option extrudes the profile to the next possible face or plane. Use the Terminator icon to select a solid or surface on which to terminate the extrusion.

To: This option extrudes the profile to terminate on the selected face or plane. If the selected termination face does not completely enclose the extrusion profile, select the extend face option to terminate the feature on the extended face.

From To: This option extrudes the profile by starting the extrusion at the face selected in the From option and ending the extrusion at the second face selected. If necessary, use the extend face options.

161Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 172: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

All: This option extrudes the profile all the way through the part. If the part changes, the extruded feature will continue to go all the way through the part.

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features162

Page 173: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing FeaturesProcedureAfter you create an extruded feature, you can edit it at any time. Because it is a sketched feature, there are two potential items that can be edited: the feature itself or the underlying sketch that was used to create the feature. When you edit the feature, you are presented with the same dialog box that you used when you created the feature. When you edit an extruded feature, you are able to change the parameters such as distance, feature relationships, and termination options and also reselect geometry to be included in the feature.

When you right-click on a feature, the shortcut menu is displayed.

Editing Extrude Features - Process OverviewFollowing is an overview of the process for editing extruded features.

1. In the Browser, locate the feature you want to edit. To edit the sketch, right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu.

The following options are available on the Feature shortcut menu:

Edit Feature: Select this option to open the Extrude dialog box. All options used in creating the feature can be modified.

Edit Sketch: Select this option to activate the sketch for editing. All sketch tools are available for editing the geometry. While editing the sketch, you can change dimensions and constraints, and add or remove geometry from the sketch. All changes are reflected in the extruded feature. Depending on the changes made at the sketch level, you may be required to edit the extruded feature. Feature Shortcut Menu

163Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 174: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2. Using standard sketch tools, make the changes required to the sketch.

3. On the Standard toolbar, click the Return button to exit the sketch.4. In the Browser, right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu.

5. In the Extrude dialog box, adjust the options as required to edit the feature and click OK.

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features164

Page 175: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Creating Extruded FeaturesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will build an Index Slide part file using several extrude features. Some initial geometry has been created, while you will be required to create other sketch geometry.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features, click Exercise: Creating Extruded Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Index Slide

165Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 176: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Revolved FeaturesOverview

Overview

OverviewYou create revolved features by revolving a profile about an axis. As you create these features, you can adjust the feature relationship options for Join, Cut, and Intersect. After you create the feature, you can also edit the underlying sketch profiles used in the revolved feature.

In this lesson you learn how to create revolved features using different feature relationship options and how to edit the feature and profiles used to create them.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Understand revolved features and how to create them

• Use the Revolve tool to create revolved features

• Understand the concept of using the Join, Cut, and Intersect options when you create revolved features

• Edit revolved features and the profiles used to create them

Indexer Part File

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features166

Page 177: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Overview of Revolved FeaturesProcedureA revolved feature is a sketched feature in which a profile is revolved about an axis. You can revolve the profile at a full 360 degrees or at an angle specified. If the profile being extruded is closed, you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of the extrusion. If the profile being extruded is open, the extrusion results in a surface.

Examples of Simple Revolved ProfilesIn this example, the sketch contains a closed profile and one centerline. When you start the Extrude tool, the centerline is automatically selected as the axis of revolution.

In this example, the sketch contains a single closed loop profile, reference geometry, and one centerline. The profile is revolved with the Cut feature relationship.

Example of Revolved Features

Example of Revolved Feature

167Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 178: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Revolve ToolProcedureYou use the Revolve tool to create revolved features from existing sketch profiles. The Revolve tool requires an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available. When you start the Revolve tool, if the sketch contains a single closed profile, that profile is selected automatically. If the sketch contains a centerline, it will be selected automatically as the axis for the revolved feature. If the sketch contains more than one profile, you are required to select the profiles to be included in the feature.

Revolve Tool - Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Revolve tool.

The following options are available in the Revolve dialog box:

Profile: Click this button to select geometry to be included in the revolved feature. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the revolved feature.

Axis: Click this icon to select the line segment to use as the axis for the revolve feature. Tip: If the sketch contains a centerline it is selected automatically as the axis.

Output: Select the desired output option: Solid or Surface.

Extents: Select the desired option from the drop-down list.

Angle: This option enables you to specify an angle and direction for the revolution.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu

Revolve Dialog Box

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features168

Page 179: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Full: This option revolves the profile 360 degrees.

Direction: Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the revolve in the desired direction. This option is available only if the Extents option is set to Angle.

Creating Revolved Features - Process OverviewThe following steps present an overview for creating revolved features.

1. Create a new sketch containing a profile to revolve. If the profile is being revolved about a centerline, consider using the Centerline style on the line segment.

2. On the Panel Bar, click the Revolve tool. In the Revolve dialog box, adjust the options as required and click OK.

169Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 180: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Create additional sketch geometry as required.

4. On the Panel Bar, click the Revolve tool. Select the geometry to be included in the revolved feature and adjust the options as required. Click OK.

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features170

Page 181: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect

ConceptWhen you create revolved features you have the ability to adjust feature relationship options to control the effect of the current feature on existing features. The feature relationship options are Join, Cut, and Intersect. These options are not available for the first feature of the part.

Join: This option joins the result of the revolved feature being created to existing part geometry. Using this option results in material being added to the existing part. Note the green preview indicating material is being added.

Cut: This option cuts the result of the revolved feature being created from the existing part. Using this option results in material being removed from the

existing part. Note the red preview indicating material is being removed.

Revolve Dialog Box - Feature Relationship Options

171Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 182: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Intersect: This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features and the new feature. Note the blue preview indicating an Intersect relationship.

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features172

Page 183: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing FeaturesProcedureAfter the revolved feature is created, you can edit it at any time. Because it is a sketched feature, there are two potential items that can be edited: the feature itself or the underlying sketch that was used to create the feature. When you edit the feature, you are presented with the same dialog box that was used when you created the feature. When you edit a revolved feature, you are able to change the parameters such as angle and feature relationships, and also reselect geometry to be included in the feature.

The following options are available on the shortcut menu when you right-click on a revolved feature.

Edit Feature: Displays the Revolve dialog box. All options used in creating the feature can be modified.

Edit Sketch: Activates the sketch for editing. All sketch tools are available for editing the geometry. While editing the sketch, you can change dimensions and constraints, and even add or remove geometry from the sketch. All changes will be reflected in the revolved feature. Depending on the changes made at the sketch level, you may be required to edit the revolved feature.

Feature Shortcut Menu

173Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 184: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing Revolve Features - Process OverviewThe following steps present an overview for editing revolved features.

1. In the Browser, locate the feature you want to edit. Right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu.

2. Using standard sketch tools, make the changes required to the sketch.

3. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit the sketch.4. In the Browser, right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu.

5. In the Revolve dialog box, adjust the options as required and click OK.

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features174

Page 185: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Creating Revolved FeaturesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create a simple Indexer part file using the Revolve tool. The origin Z axis is projected on the first sketch and changed to a centerline. You use the Project Geometry and Project Cut Edges tools to create different profiles to be revolved.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features, click Exercise: Creating Revolved Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Indexer Part File

175Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 186: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched FeaturesChallenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features

Print Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create a 3D Rack Slide part using the dimensions and geometry shown below. Create a new part file and using the concepts and techniques learned in this chapter, create a 3D model of the geometry described below. Name your part file Rack-Slide.ipt.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features, click Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Rack Slide Dimensions

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features176

Page 187: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter SummarySummary

SummaryYou learned the following in this chapter:

• The concept of creating sketched features and sharing sketches.

• How to identify consumed and unconsumed sketches.

• To use the Sketch tool to create new sketches.

• How to create new sketches on existing part faces.

• Different ways to create reference geometry from existing part edges.

• To create and edit extrude features using the Extrude tool.

• The effect of feature relationships on geometry.

• How to specify termination options when using the Extrude tool.

• To create and edit revolve features using the Revolve tool.

• The effect of feature relationships on geometry when using the Revolve tool.

177Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 188: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features178

Page 189: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In this chapterAfter completing this chapter, you will be able to...

• Locate and utilize the default work features.

• Create work planes.

• Create work axes.

• Create work points.

• Control the appearance of work features.

• Redefine work features.

Introduction to Work Features

Chapter IntroductionIn this chapter you learn about...

• Locating and utilizing the default work planes.

• Creating new work planes using several different methods.

• Controlling the appearance of work planes

• Editing work planes.

• Locating and utilizing the default work axes

• Create work axes.

• Different methods for defining work axes.

• Controlling the appearance of work axes.

• Redefining a work axis after you have created it.

• Locating and utilizing the default work point.

• Creating work points.

• Different methods for defining work points

• Controlling the appearance of work points.

• Redefining a work point after you have created it.

Page 190: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

1

Work PlanesOverview

Overview

OverviewWork planes are planes that extend infinitely. You can use them to assist in creating geometry, placing constraints, and completing other modeling tasks. There are two main types of work planes: default work planes and user-defined work planes.

In this lesson you learn to create and use work planes.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Locate, display and use the default work planes in part and assembly files

• How to use the Work Plane tool to create additional work planes

• Identify examples of work planes

• Control the visibility of work planes.

Control Valve with Work Planes

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features80

Page 191: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Default Work PlanesConceptEvery part and assembly file contains default work planes. These work planes are located in the Origin folder of the Part/Assembly Browser. The default work planes extend infinitely from the origin point. There are three default work planes, each representing a different coordinate plane. The three planes represented are the YZ plane, XZ plane, and XY plane.

When you create a new part file, the initial sketch is created on one of these default planes. You can create additional sketches and/or features using the model or the default work planes.

Access MethodsUse the following method to access the default work planes.

Potential Uses for Default Work PlanesFollowing are some potential uses for default work planes:

Browser Expand the Origin folder in the browser.

Default Work Planes

181Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 192: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Basis for new sketches

• Basis for assembly constraints

• Feature termination options

• Basis for new work features

Default Work Plane - Appearance Properties

The following options are available to control the appearances of work planes.

• Visibility: This property is off by default. Right-click on the work plane and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn on the work plane visibility.

• Auto-Resize: This property is on by default and enables the visible size of the work plane to adjust according to the geometry in the current file. All work planes with this option enabled are resized equally. To prevent the work plane from resizing, select this option and clear the check mark. The following image represents the work plane size before and after creating geometry.

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features182

Page 193: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Work Plane ToolProcedureYou use the Work Plane tool to create work planes in the current part or assembly file. Work planes are used to define planar surfaces when the existing geometry does not represent the required plane. Work planes are parametrically attached to the model geometry and/or default work planes. When you create a work plane using features of existing geometry, if the geometry changes, the work plane will also change. For example, if you create a work plane that is tangent to a cylindrical surface with a radius of 2 mm, and that radius later changes to 5 mm, the work plane will move to retain the tangent relationship with the cylinder.

In the image below, the work plane is created at a 30 degree angle from part face. The circular extrusion is created from the work plane extruding to meet the part face. As the angle of the part face changes, the work plane updates to maintain the 30 degree angle, and circular feature changes with the work plane.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Work Plane tool.

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut ]

183Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 194: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Repeating the Work Plane ToolIf you need to create multiple work planes, you can activate the Repeat Command option. While the Work Plane tool is active, right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. The Work Plane tool is repeated until you cancel the command.

Process Overview - Creating Work PlanesWhen you create work planes, the type of work plane is based completely on the geometry you select. For example, there is no dialog box to create a planar offset work plane. All work planes are created based on two or three selections. Each selection represents either an orientation or position.

The following steps represent an example for creating a work plane that is aligned with the Origin XY plane and tangent to the outside of the cylinder.

1. Select the feature or plane.

2. Select the second feature or plane.

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features184

Page 195: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The resulting work plane is created.

Redefining Work PlanesAs you create work planes, they appear in the browser just like other parametric features, however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. If you right-click the work plane in the browser or graphics window, the Redefine Feature option is available. You can select this option to recreate the work plane using any valid method. Any geometry that was based on the work plane being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work plane.

185Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 196: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Examples of Work PlanesConceptSeveral methods are available for creating work planes. When you create work planes, you select geometry and/or other work features. Each selection will define either orientation or position for the new work plane. Following are some of the most common methods used to create work planes.

• Aligned to origin plane/tangent to cylindrical surface

• Aligned to face/midpoint between two faces

• Offset from plane or surface

Selection 1 - Origin Work Plane

Selection 2 - Cylindrical Surface

Result

Selection 1 - Part Face Selection 2 - Part Face Result

Selection 1 - Click and drag from plane or surface

Selection 2 - Release the mouse and enter an offset

distance

Result

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features186

Page 197: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Angle from face/along an edge

• Work plane on 3 points

Selection 1 - Part Face Selection 2 - Planar Surface on Part, Enter

Angle

Result

Selection 1 - Vertex on Geometry Selection 2 - Vertext on Geometry

Selection 3 - Vertex on Geometry Result

187Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 198: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Parallel to face/midpoint of edge

Work Plane AppearanceProcedureThe appearance of work planes is controlled in a number of different ways. You can control the visibility of the work planes and move and/or resize them.

Controlling Global VisibilityYou can toggle the visibility of work features and sketches by using the options on this menu. Select the appropriate option or use the keyboard shortcuts.

Individual Work Plane VisibilityTo control individual work plane visibility, in the browser, right-click the work plane and click Visibility on the shortcut menu.

Selection 1 - Part Face Selection 2 - Part Face Result

View Menu > Object Visibility

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features188

Page 199: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Resizing Work PlanesPlace your cursor over the corner of the work plane. When the resize indicator appears, click and drag the corner of the work plane to resize it.

Moving Work PlanesPlace your cursor over an edge of the work plane. When the move indicator appears, click and drag the work plane to a new location.

Resizing Work Planes

Moving Work Planes

189Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 200: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Work PlanesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create a cylindrical control valve using both origin planes and work planes.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features, click Exercise: Work Planes

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Control Valve with Work Planes

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features190

Page 201: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Work AxesOverview

Overview

OverviewA work axis is an axis that extends infinitely and is used to assist you in creating geometry, placing constraints, and completing other modeling tasks. There are two main types of work axes: default work axes and user-defined work axes.

In this lesson you learn to create and use work axes.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Locate, display and use the default work axes in part and assembly files

• Create additional work axes using the Work Axis tool

• Identify examples of work axes

• Control the visibility of work axes

Simple Part Created Using Work Axes

191Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 202: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Default Work AxesConceptEvery part and assembly file contains default work axes. These default work axes, located in the Origin folder of the Part/Assembly Browser, extend infinitely from the origin point. There are three default work axes, each representing a different coordinate axis. The three axes represented are the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the default work axes.

Browser Expand the Origin folder and right-click on one of the default work axes.

Default Work Axes

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features192

Page 203: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Potential Uses for Default Work AxesFollowing are some potential uses for default work axes:

• Basis for assembly constraints

• Axis of revolution for circular pattern

• Basis for new work features

• Representation of centerlines on sketches

Default Work Axes - Appearance Properties

Right-click on an origin axis to access the following options.

• Visibility: This property is off by default. Right-click on the work axis and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn on the work axis visibility.

193Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 204: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Work Axis ToolProcedureThe Work Axis tool is used to create work axes in the current part or assembly file. Work axes are used to define an axis when the existing geometry does not represent the required axis. Work axes are parametrically attached to the model geometry and/or default work features. When you create a work axis using features of existing geometry, if the geometry changes, the work axis updates to reflect those changes.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Work Axis tool.

Repeating the Work Axis ToolIf you need to create multiple work axes, you can activate the Repeat Command option. While the Work Axis tool is active, right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. The Work Axis tool is repeated until you cancel the command.

Process Overview - Creating Work AxesWhen you create a work axis, the type of work axis is based completely on the geometry you select. For example, there is no dialog box to create an axis at the intersection of two planes. All work axes are created by selecting existing geometric features or other work features. The following steps represent some examples for creating a work axis.

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut /

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features194

Page 205: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature:

• Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes:

• On the Panel Bar, click the Work Axis tool and select a Plane or Planar Surface.

• Select another Plane or Planar Surface.

• The work axis is created at the intersection of the two planes.

195Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 206: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Redefining Work AxisAs you create work axes, they appear in the browser just like other parametric features, however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. If you right-click on the work axis in the browser or graphics window, the Redefine Feature option is available. Select this option to recreate the work axis using any valid method. Any geometry that was based on the work axis being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work axis.

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features196

Page 207: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Example of Work AxesConcept

Process Overview - Creating Work AxesSeveral methods are available for creating work axes. When you create work axes, you select geometry and/or other work features. Following are some of the most common methods used to create work axes.

• Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature:

• Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes:

Selection 1 - Circular Feature Result

Selection 1 - Plane or Planar Surface

Selection 2 - Plane or Planar Surface

Result

197Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 208: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Work Axis Through Point/Normal to Plane:

• Work Axis Through Two Points:

Selection 1 - Plane or Planar Surface

Selection 2 - Point Result

Selection 1 - Point or Midpoint

Selection 2 - Point or Midpoint

Result

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features198

Page 209: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Work Axis AppearanceProcedure

Work Axis AppearanceYou can turn on or off the appearance of work axes individually or globally in the part or assembly file.

Controlling Global VisibilityYou can toggle the visibility of work features and sketches by using the options on this menu. Select the appropriate option or use the keyboard shortcuts.

Individual Work Axis VisibilityTo control individual work axis visibility, in the browser, right-click the work axis and click Visibility on the shortcut menu.

View Menu > Object Visibility

199Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 210: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Work AxesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you use work axes to add features to an existing part. You will utilize both origin work axes as well as new work axes to create the additional features required for the part.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features, click Exercise: Work Axes

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Simple Part Created Using Work Axes

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features200

Page 211: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Work PointsOverview

Overview

OverviewWork points are used to represent a single point on the geometry or in space. Each part and assembly file contains one center point work point representing the 0,0,0 coordinate. You can create other work points that are parametrically attached to the geometry or grounded to a location specified.

In this lesson you learn how to create and use both grounded and parametric work points.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Utilize the Center Point work point when creating geometry

• Create parametric work points

• Create grounded work points

• Identify methods used to create work points

PC Speaker Base Component

201Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 212: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Center Point Work PointConceptEach part and assembly file contains a Center Point work point. Located under the Origin folder in the Part/Assembly browser, this point represents the 0,0,0 coordinate. Work planes and work axes extend outward from this point.

In this lesson you learn how to access and use the Center Point work point in your designs.

Identifying the Center Point Work PointExpand the Origin folder to expose the origin work features. The Center Point work point appears at the bottom of the list. By default, visibility for the center point is turned off. Right-click on the center point and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to display the center point.

Isometric View of Origin Axes and Center Point

Center Point Work Point

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features202

Page 213: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Initial Use for Center Point Work PointIt is recommended that all designs initially reference the Center Point work point by constraints or dimensions. The following steps describe how to reference the Center Point work point in your design.

1. Create a new part file. The default sketch is automatically created.2. On the Panel Bar, click the Project Geometry tool and in the browser, expand the

Origin folder and select the Center Point.

Now that the center point is projected onto the sketch, you can create your initial sketch geometry relative to its position.

203Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 214: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Next add constraints and/or dimension referencing the center point work point. This insures that when the dimensions change, the sketch geometry stays in the same position relative the origin center point. This technique also positions your geometry relative to the other origin work planes and axes for later use.

After changing the dimensions on the sketch, the geometry is still centered around the projected center point.

Note

Center Point VisibilityYou do not need to turn on the visibility of the center point to reference it in your design features. To project the center point, in the browser, expand the Origin folder and select it.

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features204

Page 215: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Work Point ToolProcedureYou use the Work Point tool to create parametric construction points on part features. Several methods are available for creating these work points. Either method creates a work point that is parametrically attached to the geometry or other work features. If this geometry changes, the work point changes accordingly.

Work points are used as construction geometry to assist in the creation of other geometry and features.

Potential Uses for Work PointsFollowing are some potential uses for work points:

• Basis for assembly constraints

• Projection onto sketches

• Basis for new work features

• Creation of 3D sketches by drawing lines between work points

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Work Point tool.

Repeating the Work Point ToolIf you need to create multiple work points, you can activate the Repeat Command option. While the Work Point tool is active, right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. The Work Point tool will be repeated until you cancel the command.

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut .

205Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 216: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Process Overview - Creating Work PointsSeveral methods are available for creating work points. The work point position is determined by the geometry or other work features that are selected. The following steps represent some examples for creating a work points.

• Creating a work point on a vertex

• Creating a work point the midpoint of an edge

On the Panel Bar, click the Work Point tool and select a vertex on the part

The work point is created on the selected vertex

On the Panel Bar, click the Work Point tool and select the of an edge

The work point is created on the midpoint of the selected edge

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features206

Page 217: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Creating a work point at the intersection of a edge and plane

Redefining Work PointsAs you create work points, they appear in the browser just like other parametric features, however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. If you right-click on the work point in the browser or graphics window, the Redefine Feature option is available. Selecting this option enables you to recreate the work point using any valid method. Any geometry that was based on the work point being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work point.

On the Panel Bar, click the Work Point tool and

select an edge or axis

Select a plane or surface The work point is created at the intersection of the

edge and plane

207Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 218: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Grounded Work PointsProcedureUnlike standard work points which must be placed somewhere on the geometry or at an intersection of geometry and/work features, grounded work points can be placed anywhere in 3D space. When you execute the Grounded Work Point tool, you must select existing geometry for the initial placement, however after the initial placement is selected, the work point can be moved and/or rotated in any direction.

After the grounded work points position has been set, it appears in the graphics window the same as a standard work point, and can be used in the same way as a standard work point. Grounded work points differ from standard work points in that they are not parametrically attached to the model geometry. Unlike standard work points which update their position to reflect changes in model geometry, grounded work points remain in their set position until manually moved.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Grounded Work Point tool.

3D Move/Rotate Dialog BoxAfter you select the initial location for the grounded work point, you are presented with the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box. The interface in the dialog box changes depending on which type of transformation you are doing on the grounded work point.

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut ;

3D Move/Rotate Dialog Box

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features208

Page 219: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The image above describes the transformation options when moving a grounded work point. When you select a Triad element for a move transformation, the fields available in the dialog box are based on the triad element selected.

When you select an axis element on the Triad, the dialog box changes to enable you to input or drag an angle value.

Grounded Work Points - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating grounded work points.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Grounded Work Point tool and select a vertex or other work point to define the initial position.

2. The work point triad appears at the selected location. To transform the grounded work point, you must select an element of the triad according to the

209Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 220: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

transformation desired.

3. Select the More tab to see additional options. Select the Redefine Alignment or Position option to realign the triad. In this image, the triad Y Axis is selected, and then the angled edge on the part is selected.

The previous steps results in the triad being aligned to the selected edge.

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features210

Page 221: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

4. In this image, the triad Y axis arrow element is selected enabling you to move the work point along the Y axis by entering a value or clicking and dragging the distance in the graphics window.

5. Click Apply or OK to create the work point at the current location.

The work point is displayed in the graphics window just like a standard work point. However, note the slightly different icon for grounded work points in the browser.

211Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 222: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Moving and Rotating Grounded Work Points - Process OverviewAfter you create the grounded work point, you have options to redefine or move/rotate the work point. Redefining a work point is the same as redefining other work features. The following steps represent an overview for using the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box to transform an existing grounded work point.

1. In the browser, right-click on the grounded work point and click 3D Move/Rotate on the shortcut menu.

2. To move the triad only, enabling you to transform the work point from a point other than its current position, in the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box select the More tab and then select the Move Triad Only option. Select the Redefine alignment or position option and select an element of the triad. In the image below, the triad is being relocated to the center of the part, where a standard work point exists. This would enable you to move or rotate the grounded work point from the new location.

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features212

Page 223: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Clear the Move Triad Only option and click the Transform tab. Select an axis element on the triad and enter or drag and angle of rotation. Click Apply or OK to position the grounded work point at the current location.

213Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 224: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Additional Examples of Work PointsConceptFollowing are some additional methods for creating work points.

• Work point at the intersection of a line or axis and a surface:

• Work point at the intersection of a plane and a curve:

Selection 1 - Line or Axis Selection 2 - Surface Result

Selection 1 - Plane or Face Selection 2 - Curve Result

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features214

Page 225: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Work PointsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create a PC speaker base component by using sketched features and work points. To save time, the sketch geometry has already been created.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features, click Exercise: Work Points

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

PC Speaker Base Component

215Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 226: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work FeaturesChallenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features

Print Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise you create the Offset-Rod-Guide part by using the concepts and procedures you learned in this chapter. You create different types of work features, sketched features, and hole features.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features, click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Offset-Rod-Guide

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features216

Page 227: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter SummarySummary

SummaryYou learned the following in this chapter:

• How to locate and utilize the default work planes contained in every part and assembly file.

• How to create new work planes using different methods to define them.

• How to control the appearance of work planes in your part and assembly files.

• How to use the default work axes as well as create new work axes. Y

• How to redefine and control the appearance of work axes in your model.

• How to use the default center point work point.

• How to create new work points, both parametric and grounded.

• How to redefine and control the appearance of work points in your model.

217Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 228: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features218

Page 229: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In this chapterAfter completing this chapter, you will be able to...

• Create and edit fillet features.

• Use the options on each tab of the Fillet dialog box to control how a fillet is created.

• Create and edit chamfer features.

• Use the three available methods for creating chamfer features.

• Create and edit hole and thread features.

• Create and edit thread features on your part by using the Thread tool.

• Create and edit shell features to remove material from a part.

• Use the options contained in the Shell dialog box.

• Create and edit rectangular and circular patterns.

• Apply face drafts to a part model by using the Face Draft tool.

• Create and use custom color styles on a part model.

Introduction to Placed Features

Chapter IntroductionIn this chapter you learn about...

• Creating and editing Fillet features.

• Different types of fillets that can be created.

• Creating and editing chamfer features.

• The three different methods for defining chamfer features.

• Using the Hole and Thread tools.

• Representing external and/or internal threads on a part.

• Creating Shell features to remove material from your part model.

• Creating rectangular and circular patterns of features on your part.

• Adding Face Drafts to a model.

• Setting the draft angle and pull direction.

• Applying custom color styles to a part model.

Page 230: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2

Fillet FeaturesOverview

Overview

OverviewFillet features are among the most widely used features on any three-dimensional (3D) part. Fillets are commonly used when parts are designed to remove sharp edges and reduce the potential of stress cracking, and also for aesthetic purposes. They can exist on geometry in various sizes and shapes. The most common type of fillet feature is a constant radius fillet, however certain situations may call for the use of variable radius fillets.

In this lesson you learn how to create both constant and variable radius fillets.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Use the Fillet tool to create constant and variable radius fillets

Pillar Block with Fillets

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features20

Page 231: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Fillet ToolProcedureYou use the Fillet tool to create fillets and rounds on existing 3D geometry. You can create both constant radius and variable radius fillets with the Fillet tool.

Access MethodsYou can use the following methods to access the Fillet tool.

Constant Radius Tab

Edge Sets: An edge set consists of selected edges and a radius value.

Edges: Displays the number of edges selected for this edge set. The arrow icon indicates you are in the selection mode and can continue to select the required edges.

Before and After Fillet Features

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+F

Fillet Dialog Box - Constant Tab

221Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 232: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Radius: Specify a value for the radius of the fillet for each edge set. Although each edge set can have a different radius value, they are all treated as one fillet feature. The pencil icon indicates that the radius value is being edited. You cannot select additional edges until you select the edges field of the edge set.

To remove selected edges from the edge set, select the appropriate edge set in the dialog box, then while holding the CTRL or SHIFT key, select the edges to be removed.

Click to add: Select this area of the dialog box to create a new edge set. Each edge set consist of selected edges and a specific radius.

Select mode area: Determines how edges are selected.

• Edge: Enables you to select or remove individual edges for the fillet.

• Loop: Enables you to select or remove the edges of a closed loop on a face.

• Feature: Enables you to select or remove all edges of a feature at once.

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features222

Page 233: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

All Fillets: Select this option to automatically select all concave edges and corners. If some edges have already been selected, a new edge set is created for the remaining edges. The manually selected edges are not included in the new edge set. You cannot remove individual edges from the All Fillets edge set.

All Rounds: Select this option to automatically select all convex edges and corners. If some edges are already selected, a new edge set is created for the remaining edges. The manually selected edges are not included in the new edge set. You cannot remove individual edges from the All Rounds edge set.

Variable Radius Tab

Edges: Select the edge to place a variable radius fillet. Only one edge is allowed per selection. Use the Click to Add area for additional edges.

Fillet Dialog Box - Variable Tab

223Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 234: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Point: List the start point and endpoint of the selected edge. Select additional points along the edge for more control over the variable radius.

Radius: Enter a radius value for the selected point. The point selected in the dialog box is highlighted on the edge.

Position: Specify a position along the selected edge for the selected point. Values represent the percentage from the start point. For example, .25 represents a distance 25% of the length of the edge from the start point.

Smooth radius transition: Select this option to gradually blend the radius between points. Clear this option to create fillets with a linear transition between the points.

On Off

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features224

Page 235: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Setbacks Tab

Vertex: Select the vertex of three selected edges.

Edge/Setback: Select each edge and specify a setback value for the edge. The value specified represents a distance along the selected edge from the vertex.

When you create fillets on three edges that meet at a vertex, using the Setbacks tab is optional. The following images represent the result of using the Setbacks tab.

Fillet Dialog Box - Setbacks Tab

Not Using Setbacks Using Setbacks

225Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 236: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Fillet Dialog Box - OptionsTo access the following options, click the [>>] button to expand the Fillet dialog box.

Roll along sharp edges: This option sets the solution method for the fillet when conditions would cause adjacent edges to be extended in order to maintain the radius. If this option is selected, the fillet radius varies when necessary to preserve the adjacent faces. If this option is not selected, the fillet radius remains constant and adjacent edges are extended as required to maintain the radius.

Rolling ball where possible: This option sets the corner style for the fillets.

Fillet Dialog Box - Expanded

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features226

Page 237: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Automatic Edge Chain: When this option is selected, all edges tangent to the selected edge are selected automatically.

Preserve All Features: When this option is selected, features that intersect the fillet feature are checked and their intersections are calculated. If this option is not selected, features that intersect with the fillet are not calculated. Only the selected edge is calculated during the fillet operation.

In the following images, the cut feature would intersect the fillet feature. An error results when creating the fillet feature. Editing the fillet feature and enabling the Preserve All Features option fixes the problem and the fillet and cut features remain valid.

Creating Constant Radius Fillets - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating constant radius fillet features.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Fillet tool.

2. With the Fillet dialog box displayed, in the graphics window, select the edges to be filleted and specify a radius for each edge set. Create an edge set for each different radius. In the image below, two edge sets have been created. The first edge set contains two edges to receive a 2 mm fillet and the second set contains three edges to receive a 1 mm fillet.

Feature Intersecting Fillet

227Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 238: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Click OK to create the fillet feature. Note in the browser only one fillet feature appears even though five edges were filleted in this example.

Creating Variable Radius Fillets - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating variable radius fillet features.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Fillet tool.2. With the Fillet dialog box displayed, select the Variable tab, and in the graphics

window, select the edge(s) to apply the variable radius fillet. In the Fillet dialog box, click the Start point to modify and in the Radius field enter the radius for the Start point then click the End point to modify the radius End point.

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features228

Page 239: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. To add an additional point along the selected edge, drag the cursor along the selected edge and left click to add the point.

4. After the additional point(s) is added, in the Radius box specify a radius for the fillet at the selected point and in the Position box specify a position along the edge for the new point.

5. Click OK to create the fillet.

229Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 240: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing Fillet FeaturesAfter you have created a Fillet feature, you can edit it using the same dialog box. In the browser, right-click the Fillet feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. The Fillet dialog box is displayed enabling you to change the fillet parameters, add or remove selections, and change options.

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features230

Page 241: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Fillet FeaturesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create fillet features on the existing Pillar-Block-Rev-2 component. You will create both constant and variable radius fillets.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Fillet Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Pillar Block with Fillets

231Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 242: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chamfer FeaturesOverview

Overview

OverviewYou can place chamfer features on parts to serve different purposes from functional to aesthetic. Chamfers can exist on parts in various sizes and angles.

In this lesson you learn how to create and edit chamfer features.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Use the Chamfer tool to create and edit chamfers

Rod-Bearing-Mount Complete with Chamfers

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features232

Page 243: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Chamfer ToolProcedureYou use the Chamfer tool to add chamfer features to edges on your part. These features, like other features, are fully parametric and easily editable after you create them. When you create chamfer features, you can choose from three different methods which determine how the chamfer is specified. With any of the methods, the end result is the replacement of the selected edge(s) with a face(s) at an angle specified either directly or indirectly through the use of distances.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Chamfer tool.

When you use any of the above listed methods to access the Chamfer tool, the following options are available. There are three methods for creating chamfers, Single Distance, Distance/Angle, and Distance/Distance. Each method presents different options in the Chamfer dialog box.

Edges: Select the edges to be chamfered

Before and After Chamfer Features

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+K

Chamfer Dialog Box - Single Distance Option

233Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 244: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Distance: Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is applied to both sides of the selected edge resulting in a 45-degree chamfer.

Edges: Select the edge(s) to be chamfered. This option is disabled until you select a face. The edge(s) selected must be adjacent to the selected face.

Face: Select a face adjacent to the edge you are chamfering. The angle is measured from this face.

Distance: Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is measured from the selected edge along the selected face.

Angle: Enter an angle for the chamfer. The angle is measured from the selected face.

Edge: Select the edge to be chamfered. When you use this method, only one edge can be chamfered at a time.

Click this button to flip the sides of the selected edge for calculating Distance1 and Distance2.

Distance1: Specify the first distance of the chamfer. This distance is measured along one of the adjacent faces.

Distance2: Specify the second distance of the chamfer. This distance is measured along the opposite adjacent face.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Distance/Angle Option

Chamfer Dialog Box - Distance/Distance Option

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features234

Page 245: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

You can expand the Chamfer dialog box by clicking the [>>] button. Expanding the Chamfer dialog box presents the following options.

Edge Chain: The options control how the edges are selected.

The edge selected and all tangentially connected edges.

Only the edge selected.

Setback: This option is available only when using the single distance method. When chamfering three edges that meet at a corner, this option determines the result of the corner.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Expanded Area

235Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 246: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating and Editing Chamfer Features - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating and editing chamfer features.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Chamfer tool.2. In the Chamfer dialog box, select the desired method to create the chamfer.

• For a single distance chamfer, select the edge(s) to be chamfered, enter a distance for the chamfer and click OK.

• The resulting chamfer is created

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features236

Page 247: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• For the Distance/Angle method, select the Distance/Angle option. Select the face, and then select the edge(s) to be chamfered. Enter a distance and angle for the chamfer and click OK.

• The resulting chamfer is created

• For the Distance/Distance method, select the Distance/Distance option. Select the edge to be chamfered. Enter distance values in the Distance1 and Distance2 fields.

Optionally flip the direction of the chamfer by clicking the Flip Direction icon.

237Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 248: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Click OK to create the chamfer.

The resulting chamfer is created.

Editing Chamfer FeaturesAfter the chamfer feature is created, it will appear in the browser. Right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. The Chamfer dialog box is displayed enabling you to edit the feature the same way it was created.

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features238

Page 249: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Chamfer FeaturesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will add chamfer features to an existing part. After the features have been created, you will edit the chamfer features and view the result.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Chamfer Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Rod-Bearing-Mount Complete with Chamfers

239Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 250: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Hole and Thread FeaturesOverview

Overview

OverviewHole features enable you to create parametric holes on your part. Although Hole features are considered to be placed features, they do require an unconsumed sketch representing the center point locations for the holes. You use the Thread tool to place both internal and external thread features on the part.

In this lesson you learn how to use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features and how to use the Thread tool to create parametric thread features on existing geometry.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Use the Hole tool to create and edit hole features

• Use the Hole tool to create internal thread features and use the Thread tool to create external thread features

Hydraulic Valve Component

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features240

Page 251: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Hole ToolProcedureYou use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features on parts. Although you can create holes by extruding a circle with a Cut feature relationship, the Hole tool provides greater flexibility in the variations and types of holes, such as counterbore, countersink, and threads. With the Hole tool you can create the various hole types in a single dialog box, rather than having to manually edit or create geometry to achieve the same result.

When you create holes using the Hole tool, you must create a sketch containing the hole center points. You can create center points using the Point/Hole Center sketch tool, the endpoints of sketched lines, or points projected from other geometry in the part. When you start the Hole tool, you are presented with different options for the type of hole being created. You can create standard drilled holes, counterbored holes, and countersunk holes. Additional options for the drill point and thread options are also available.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Hole tool.

Part with Various Types of Holes

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu

Keyboard Shortcut H

241Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 252: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Holes dialog box includes the following options and specifications:

Centers: Select the center points to use for the hole(s). If you create the sketch using the Point/Hole Center objects, the center points will be selected automatically. Other acceptable points include endpoints of lines, projected centerpoints of circles and arcs, and projected work points. You can also clear hole centers from the selection set by holding the CTRL key and selecting the center points.

Type: Click the button representing the desired hole type: drilled, counterbore, and countersink.

Termination: Select one of the following Termination types:

• Distance: This option enables you to specify a depth for the hole in the preview area of the dialog box.

• Through All: This option enables the hole to go all the way through the part.

• To: This option enables you to specify a face or plane to terminate the hole.

Click this button to flip the direction of the hole.

Drill Point: Select either a flat bottom drill or standard tapered drill point.

• Optionally specify an angle other than the standard 118-degree drill point.

Tapped: This option enables tapped threads in the hole and expands the Hole dialog box.

Thread Type: From the drop-down list, select the thread type.

Holes Dialog Box - Expanded

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features242

Page 253: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Full Depth: This option creates the threads at the full depth of the hole. If this option is not selected, you must specify a thread depth in the preview area of the dialog box.

Nominal Size: From the drop-down list, select the nominal hole size.

Pitch: From the drop-down list, select the thread pitch. Available pitches are based on the selected Nominal Size.

Class: From the drop-down list, select the Class of thread.

Diameter: Select the actual diameter used to create the hole.

• Minor: Creates the hole using the Minor Diameter of the selected thread size.

• Pitch: Creates the hole using the Pitch diameter of the selected thread size.

• Major: Creates the hole using the Major Diameter of the selected thread size.

• Tap Drill: Creates the hole using the Tap Drill diameter of the selected thread size.

Right Hand: Select this option for a right-hand thread.

Left Hand: Select this option for a left-hand thread.

Creating and Editing Holes - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating and editing holes.

1. Create a new sketch containing the center point location for the hole features.

2. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit the sketch.

243Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 254: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. On the Panel Bar, click the Hole tool. If you use the Point/Hole Center sketch object, the hole centers will be automatically selected. Adjust the options in the dialog box depending on the type of hole(s) you need to create. Click OK to create the hole(s).

In some situations it may be easier to draw construction line segments to locate the center points of the holes. Remember, the endpoints of lines can be used to locate hole features.

4. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit the sketch.

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features244

Page 255: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

5. On the Panel Bar, click the Hole tool and then select the endpoints of the line segments. In the image below the endpoints are being selected and the Tapped option is being used. Select the Thread type from the drop-down list and adjust the other thread options as required. Click OK to create the threaded hole.

Note the bitmap representing a threaded hole. The bitmap will change according to the thread specification. Fine threads will appear fine while coarse threads appear coarse. Left-hand versus right-hand threads are also depicted correctly.

Tip

Preventing Interference Between Holes and FastenersIn the Threads area, set the Diameter option to Major. This creates the hole at the major diameter of the thread, thus preventing an interference being returned between the fastener and the hole.

245Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 256: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Thread FeaturesProcedureThe Thread tool enables you to create thread features on external and internal surfaces. Many of the same options available for internal threads using the Hole tool are also available when you use the Thread tool. Threads are considered a placed feature, therefore, the Thread tool does not require an unconsumed sketch. All that is required is existing cylindrical surfaces to apply the thread feature.

Access MethodsUse the following method to access the Thread tool.

The Location tab in the Thread Feature dialog box includes the following options and specifications:

Face: Click the icon to select the face(s) to apply thread features.

Example of External Thread Features

Panel Bar

Thread Feature Dialog Box - Location Tab

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features246

Page 257: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Display in Model: Select this option to display the thread bitmaps on the model. If this option is not selected, the thread feature is created but is not displayed on the geometry.

Full Length: Select this option to apply the thread feature to the entire length of the selected face. When this option is not selected, the following options become available.

Click this button to flip the direction of the thread feature.

• Length: Specifies the length of the thread feature on the selected face.

• Offset: Specifies the distance from the start face of the thread feature.

The Specification tab in the Thread Feature dialog box includes the following options and specifications:

Thread Type: Select the required thread type.

Nominal Size: The nominal thread size is automatically selected based upon the diameter of the selected face. Selecting a nominal size other than the size automatically selected may result in an error when you click OK.

Pitch: Select the appropriate thread pitch from the drop-down list.

Class: Select the appropriate thread class from the drop-down list.

Right Hand: Select this option to generate a right hand thread.

Left Hand: Select this option to generate a left hand thread.

Thread Feature Dialog Box - Specification Tab

247Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 258: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Thread Features - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating external thread features using the Thread tool.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Thread tool and select a cylindrical face on the part. On the Location tab, adjust the Thread Length options as required.

2. On the Specification tab, select the appropriate thread type and adjust the other settings as required by your design intent. Click OK to create the thread feature.

The thread feature appears on the model geometry as well as in the browser. Just like other parametric features, you can right-click the thread feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu to edit the feature using the same dialog box used in creating the feature.

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features248

Page 259: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Hole and Thread FeaturesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you open the Hyd-Valve-Housing part file and create new hole features. You will use the Hole tool to add the necessary hole features. You then use the Thread tool to add thread features to the component.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Hole and Thread Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Hydraulic Valve Component

249Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 260: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Shell FeaturesOverview

Overview

OverviewYou use shell features to remove material from existing solid features. By using shell features, you can create the overall shape of your part and then create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces.

In this lesson you learn how to create and edit shell features.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Use the Shell tool to create shelled features

Complete Part Containing Shell Features

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features250

Page 261: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Shell ToolProcedureYou use the Shell tool to create shelled features on existing solid geometry. With the Shell tool, you can remove material from an existing part and create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces. One key advantage to using the Shell tool is that you can create differing wall thickness for each face of the part. Generally, you select at least one face on the part to be removed from the shell feature leaving the remaining faces as the shell walls.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Shell tool.

Before and After Shell Feature

Panel Bar

Shell Dialog Box

251Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 262: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Remove Faces: Click this icon to select the face(s) to remove from the shell feature. The remaining faces serve as walls for the shell feature. If you do not remove any faces from the shell feature, it will result in a cavity in the part with no open faces.

Thickness: Specify value for the wall thickness.

Direction: Click one of the direction buttons.

• Inside: The thickness is applied to the inside of the existing faces.

• Outside: The thickness is applied to the outside of the existing faces.

• Both: Half of the thickness is applied to each side of the face.

Unique face thickness: Select the Click to Add area of the dialog box to create unique face thicknesses for the shell feature. Select the face(s) and specify a unique wall thickness for the face. This value overrides the default thickness for the selected face(s) only.

Creating Shell Features - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating shell features.

1. Create a part representing the overall shape required.

2. On the Panel bar, click the Shell tool and select the faces to remove from the shell operation. In the Thickness box enter a wall thickness.

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features252

Page 263: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. To assign unique wall thicknesses, click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box and select the Click to Add area and select the face(s) to assign a unique wall thickness. Under Unique Face Thickness, specify a thickness for the selected face(s). Click OK to create the shell feature.

The shell feature is created.

253Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 264: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Shell FeaturesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will create a shell feature for the part, applying a common wall thickness to all faces. You will then edit the shell feature to include unique wall thicknesses on different features.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Shell Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Complete Part Containing Shell Features

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features254

Page 265: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Pattern FeaturesOverview

Overview

OverviewPattern features are used to parametrically duplicate selected features. There are two types of patterns: Rectangular and Circular. Each type offers different options for creating the pattern. When you pattern a feature, you are creating parametric copies of that feature. If the original feature changes, the patterned features update to reflect those changes.

In this lesson you learn how to create and edit Rectangular and Circular Pattern features.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Create and edit rectangular patterns

• Create and edit circular patterns

Completed Face Plate with Patterned Features

255Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 266: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Rectangular Pattern ToolProcedureYou use the Rectangular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a rectangular pattern. There are several options to control how the feature(s) will be patterned. You can pattern a feature along one or two directions and/or paths, with options to control feature spacing.

When you create these patterns, they are associative to the original feature, so any changes in the original feature are reflected in the pattern occurrences.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Rectangular Pattern tool.

Example of Rectangular Patterns

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+R

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features256

Page 267: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Rectangular Pattern dialog box includes the following options and specifications:

Features: Select the feature(s) to be patterned.

Direction 1:

Path: Select the path for Direction 1. This can be the edge of a part or a 2D sketch representing the path for the pattern. Use the Flip Direction button to flip the path direction.

Enter the number of occurrences for the pattern. This number includes the original feature.

Enter a value for the pattern distance. This value represents either total distance of the pattern or spacing between each feature.

Select one of the following options from the drop-down list:

Spacing: Distance value represents the spacing between each occurrence.

Distance: Distance value represents the total pattern distance.

Curve Length: Disables the Distance field and divides the curve length by the number of occurrences.

Direction 2: This column is optional and contains the same options as Direction 1.

Start: Sets the start point for the first occurrence. Pattern can start at any selected point.

Rectangular Pattern Dialog Box - Expanded

257Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 268: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Termination Method:

Identical: This is the default method which provides the best performance for large patterns. Using this method, each occurrence uses an identical termination method regardless of where they intersect other features.

Adjust to Model: This method enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. This method requires more processing and can increase computational time on large patterns.

Orientation Method: These options control the orientation of the patterned features.

Identical: Occurrence orientation is identical to the first feature.

Adjust to Direction 1 or Direction 2: Occurrences will be rotated as the path changes directions.

Browser Appearance of Rectangular/Circular PatternsWhen you create patterns, the way they appear in the browser is unique compared to other features. If you expand a rectangular or circular pattern, you immediately see the difference. Located under the pattern feature, you will find any sketches used as a path, along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern. Finally you will see an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the pattern. The first Occurrence represents the initial feature used in the pattern followed by the number of occurrences created.

Right-click on an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected occurrence. This option is not available on the first occurrence.

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features258

Page 269: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Rectangular Patterns - Process OverviewThe following steps can be used to create a rectangular pattern.

1. Create a part with a feature(s) to be patterned.

2. On the Panel Bar, click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature to be patterned. Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select a path, part edge, or origin axis for the pattern. Enter the number of occurrences and distance values and adjust the Spacing method accordingly. Optionally include information for Direction 2 and click OK.

3. To create a pattern along a path, create a 2D sketch containing the path for the pattern.

4. On the Panel Bar, click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature(s) to be patterned. Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select the path for the pattern. Adjust the number of occurrence, distance, and spacing options as required and click OK. Optionally provide information for Direction 2.

259Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 270: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Circular Pattern ToolProcedureYou use the Circular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a circular pattern. When you create these patterns, they are associative to the original feature, so any changes in the original feature are reflected in the pattern occurrences.

When you start the Circular Pattern tool, you must first select a feature to pattern. You then select a rotation axis which serves as the center of the pattern. Next you set the pattern properties such as number of occurrences and angle. There are also options for controlling the creation method and positioning method.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Circular Pattern tool.

Example of a Circular Pattern

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+O

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features260

Page 271: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Circular Pattern dialog box includes the following options and specifications:

Features: Select the feature(s) to be patterned.

Rotation Axis: Select the rotation axis for the pattern. Valid selections include circular faces, work axes, or part edges.

Placement:

: Specify the number of occurrences for the pattern. This number includes the original feature.

: Specify the angle for the pattern. The result of this angle is based on the Positioning Method chosen.

: Flips the rotational direction of the pattern.

Creation Method:

Identical: This the default method which provides the best performance for large patterns. Using this method, each occurrence uses an identical termination method regardless of where they intersect other features.

Adjust to Model: This method enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. This method requires more processing and can increase computational time on large patterns.

Positioning Method:

Incremental: Sets the angle value to represent the angle between occurrences.

Fitted: Sets the angle value to represent the total rotational angle of the pattern.

Circular Pattern Dialog Box - Expanded

261Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 272: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Browser Appearance of Rectangular/Circular PatternsWhen you create patterns, the way they appear in the browser is unique compared to other features. If you expand a rectangular or circular pattern, you immediately see the difference. Located under the pattern feature, you will find any sketches used as a path, along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern. Finally you will see an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the pattern. The first Occurrence represents the initial feature used in the pattern followed by the number of occurrences created.

Right-click on an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected occurrence. This option is not available on the first occurrence.

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features262

Page 273: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Circular Patterns - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating circular patterns.

1. Create a part containing the feature(s) to be patterned.

2. On the Panel Bar, click the Circular Pattern tool and select the feature(s) to be patterned. Then click the Rotation Axis icon and select the feature representing the rotation axis for the pattern.

3. Optionally click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box and adjust the options as required. Click OK to create the pattern.

263Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 274: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Pattern FeaturesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you open a face plate component and create both rectangular and patterned features. You then edit the patterned features to suppress occurrences within each.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Pattern Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Completed Face Plate with Patterned Features

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features264

Page 275: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Face DraftsOverview

Overview

OverviewWhen you create designs for casting or molds, you need to apply draft angles to the faces to allow for the part to be pulled from the mold. This draft angle is referred to as a face draft. Depending on the design and manufacturing intent, you might apply the draft angle to all faces, or to single selected faces.

In this lesson you learn how to apply draft angles to faces using the Face Draft tool.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Use the Face Draft tool to create and edit face drafts

Indexer Component with Face Drafts

265Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 276: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Face Draft ToolProcedureYou use the Face Draft tool to apply draft angles to selected faces on the part. A draft angle applied to faces on the part allows the part to be pulled away from the mold. When you create a face draft feature, you must specify the Pull Direction, which can be based on a face, edge, or origin plane or axis. After you define the Pull Direction, you select the faces to apply the draft angle. The result of the draft angle depends on the orientation of the face in relation to the Pull Direction.

When you create the face draft feature, you can also choose between a Fixed Edge face draft or Fixed Plane face draft. In this lesson you learn how to create face drafts using each of these methods.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Face Draft tool.

Before and After Face Draft Feature

Note

Face Draft AnglesIn reality, draft angles are generally very small. For visual clarity, the draft angles in this lesson may be exaggerated.

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+D

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features266

Page 277: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Face Draft dialog box includes the following options and specifications:

Fixed Edge Method: This method creates a face draft on the selected face(s) and the selected edge remains fixed in place.

Fixed Plane Method: This method creates a face draft calculated from the location of the selected plane. The Pull Direction is normal to the selected plane.

Depending on the position of the selected plane this method causes material to be added on one side of the plane and subtracted from the opposite side of the plane.

Pull Direction: Select a face, plane, edge, or axis to define the direction the part is pulled away from the mold. After you make the selection, you can use the Flip Direction button to flip the Pull Direction.

Faces: Select the faces to apply the face draft feature. If using the Fixed Edge method, be certain to select the edge you want to remain fixed. Note: If you select an incorrect edge, use the CTRL or SHIFT key and reselect the edge to remove it from the selection set.

Draft Angle: Specify an angle value for the face draft.

267Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 278: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Face Drafts - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating face drafts.

1. Create a new part containing the features requiring face drafts.

2. On the Panel Bar, click the Face Draft tool. In the Face Draft dialog box, select the Fixed Edge or Fixed Plane method and then select a face, plane, edge, or axis to define the Pull Direction.

3. Select the faces to apply the face draft. If you are using the Fixed Edge method, select the face at a point closest to the fixed edge. In the Draft Angle box, enter an angle value. Click OK to create the face draft.

The face drafts are applied to the selected faces.

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features268

Page 279: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Face DraftsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create and edit face drafts on the part. You will experiment with both the Fixed Edge method and Fixed Plane method for creating the face draft.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Face Drafts

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Indexer Component with Face Drafts

269Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 280: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating and Using Color StylesOverview

Overview

OverviewAs you create new parts using Autodesk Inventor, a default color style is assigned. You can assign different colors to parts and even create new custom color styles.

In this lesson you learn how to create and assign color styles to parts.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Change and assign color styles to parts

Assigning a New Color Style

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features270

Page 281: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating and Using Color StylesProcedureWhen you create new parts, they are assigned the Default color style. Other color styles are available and can be accessed from the Style drop-down list on the Standard toolbar.

Color styles are stored within each part or assembly file. If you create a new color style, it is available only in the part or assembly in which it was created. You can copy these custom color styles to templates or other part files by using the Organizer tool, which is located on the Format pull-down menu.

Use the following methods to create and apply color styles.

Style Name: Enter a color style name. The list will update to reflect the closest match. When selecting a material from the list, the color style name will appear here.

Color Tab: Located on this tab, is four color properties, Diffuse, Emissive, Specular, and Ambient. Select the color swatch next to each properties and select a color from the Custom Color dialog box.

Appearance: Use the sliders to adjust the Shiny and Opaque color properties.

Save: Click to save the changes to the selected color style.

Pull-Down Menu Format > Colors

To Assign Colors - Standard Toolbar

Color Dialog Box

271Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 282: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Delete: Click to delete the selected color style.

New: Click to create a new color style.

Apply: Click to apply the changes to the color style, and leave the dialog box open.

Close: Click to close the dialog box.

Choose: Click to display the Texture Chooser dialog box.

%Scale: Adjust the slider to scale the texture map.

Rotation: Adjust the slider to rotate the texture map.

Remove: Click to remove the selected texture from the color style.

Select a texture by dragging the slider in the preview window.

Texture Library:

• Application Library: Select this option to display textures from the Application library.

• Project Library: Select this option to display textures stored within the current project.

Colors Dialog Box - Texture Tab

Texture Chooser Dialog Box

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features272

Page 283: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Creating and Using Color StylesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will create a new color style and apply it to your part.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Assigning a New Color Style

273Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 284: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed FeaturesChallenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features

Print Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise you will utilize the procedures and concepts learned in this lesson to create a plastic handle. The handle is a two piece design for which you are creating one half of the handle.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed

Features

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Plastic Handle

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features274

Page 285: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter SummarySummary

SummaryYou learned the following in this chapter:

• How to create and edit fillet features on a part file.

• How to use the options on each tab of the Fillet dialog box to control how a fillet feature is created.

• Three methods available for creating chamfers and how to use each method.

• How to create and edit Hole and Thread features on a part model.

• The different options available in the Holes dialog box and how to use these options to create different types of holes.

• How to add thread features to a model.

• How to remove material from your part by using the Shell tool.

• How to use the options in the Shell dialog box and how they effect the shell feature.

• How to create and edit rectangular and circular patterns on a part model.

• The options available for each type of pattern and the effect of these options on the pattern features.

• How to edit a pattern and suppress feature occurrences in the pattern if required.

• How to use the Face Draft tool to apply draft angles to selected faces on a part model.

• Why face drafts are typically used and how these manufacturing methods correlate to options in the dialog box such as Pull-Direction.

• How to create and use custom color styles on a part model.

• How to create a custom color style that includes a texture map.

• How to adjust options in the Colors dialog box to effect the appearance properties of a new color style.

275Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 286: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features276

Page 287: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In this chapterAfter completing this chapter, you will be able to...

• Apply Bottom Up, Top Down, and Middle Out assembly techniques

• Use the browser to control different aspects of the assembly environment

• Activate components in-place within the assembly, resequence and reorder the assembly and use browser filters

• Create Design Views to save assembly views with specific display related characteristics

• Place components in an assembly using the Place Component tool

• Drag components into an assembly

• Replace existing components in an assembly

• Create new components in the context of the assembly

• Place assembly constraints

• Create basic adaptive features for parts used in an assembly

Assembly Modeling FundamentalsOverview

Overview

Chapter IntroductionIn this chapter you learn about...

• The assembly modeling environment and interface used to create assembly models.

• The Assembly Browser.

• Controlling the appearance of parts and features in the browser and using Design Views to save assembly views.

• The Place Component tool.

• Dragging components into the assembly and replacing components in the assembly.

• Creating components in the context of the assembly.

• Assembly based work features

• Using geometry projected from other parts in the assembly to help create new parts.

• Degrees of freedom

• Simulating motion in an assembly

• Placing assembly constraints.

• Adaptivity and how it can be used in the assembly.

• Analyzing components of an assembly.

• Locating components in and out of the assembly by using different versions of the Find tool.

Page 288: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2

Introduction to Assembly ModelingOverviewUsing Assembly modeling you bring individual components into a common environment and use various tools to assemble them. You create new geometry, place existing parts and/or assemblies, and manage the relationships between the parts in the assembly.

In this lesson, you will learn the concept of assembly modeling and the tools you use to create an assembly.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Understand the concept of assembly modeling and the procedures you use to create an assembly model

• Navigate the assembly environment and identify the assembly coordinate system

• Use the Assembly Panel Bar

Completed Assembly

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals78

Page 289: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly Modeling ConceptsConceptYou create an assembly by combining multiple components and/or assemblies into a single environment. Parametric relationships are created between each component that determine component behavior in the assembly.

These relationships can range from simple constraint based relationships that determine a components position in the assembly, to advanced relationships such as adaptivity, which enables a component to change size based upon its relationship to other components in the assembly.

Typical Assembly Model

279Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 290: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly Modeling MethodsBefore you create assembly models you must understand the three basic methods you use to create them and how to choose the correct assembly modeling approach.

• Top Down Assembly Modeling: All assembly components are designed in the context of the assembly. You create a blank assembly, then design each component while still in the assembly environment. As you design each component, you are applying the required assembly constraints, and are making changes to parts based upon their relationships to other components in the assembly.You create and edit all geometry while working in the overall assembly. The image below represents a Top-Down approach to assembly modeling. The initial part is created, then while working in the context of the assembly, additional parts are created.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals280

Page 291: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Bottom Up Assembly Modeling: Individual components for an assembly are designed outside of the assembly where they will be placed. Each part file is designed separate from the assembly and other parts. After you create the parts they are placed into the assembly and constrained to other parts. If changes to the parts are required, they are made outside of the assembly and will automatically be reflected in the assembly model.The image below represents a typical Bottom-Up approach to assembly modeling. Each part is designed separate from the assembly and other components. After the components are designed, they are placed into the assembly.

281Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 292: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Middle Out Assembly Modeling: This flexible approach closely represents the actual real-world design process. For example, a typical assembly would generally consist of components that are designed specifically for the assembly, and other standard off-the-shelf components such as nuts, bolts, or other standard hardware. So even if you design all of the non-standard components using a Top-Down approach, as soon as you insert the standard off-the-shelf components, you have essentially switched to Middle Out approach because you have included parts in the assembly that were created outside of the assembly.The image below represents a Middle Out approach to assembly modeling. Some components are being placed in the assembly, while others are being designed in the context of the assembly.

You can use all of the methods above and switch between them at anytime. You can begin the assembly using one method and change to a different one. As you become more proficient with the application, and understand the benefits to each modeling approach, you will be able to choose the best approach for a given task.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals282

Page 293: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly ConstraintsYou use Assembly constraints to create parametric relationships between parts in the assembly. Just as you use 2D constraints to control 2D geometry, you use 3D constraints in an assembly to position parts in relation to other parts. There are four basic assembly constraints, each with unique solutions and options.

Mate/Flush Constraint: Used to align part features such as faces, edges, or axis.

Angle Constraint: Used to specify an angle between two parts. Applied to faces, edges, or axes.

Tangent Constraint: Used to define a tangential relationship between two parts. Generally applied to circular faces and planar faces. One of the selected faces must be circular.

Insert Constraint: Used to insert one component into another. This constraint effectively combines a mate axis/axis and a mate face/face constraint. Generally applied to bolts, or pins, or any part that needs to be inserted into a hole on another part. Applied by selecting a circular edge on each part.

Each of these constraint types will be described in greater detail later in this chapter.

283Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 294: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

SubassembliesYou use Subassemblies to organize large assemblies into smaller groups. A subassembly is essentially an assembly placed into another assembly. In the context of the overall assembly, the subassembly behaves as a single part. Components within the subassembly are constrained to each other, while the subassembly is constrained to the overall assembly as a single component. You must edit constraints within the assembly where they were created. To do so you activate the subassembly by double-clicking on the subassembly in the browser.

Assembly SketchingYou use Assembly sketching to create assembly based features such as holes, extrusions, and chamfers on parts in the assembly. The features however are not stored within the parts that are affected but are local to the current assembly and only effect the parts in the context of the current assembly. Assembly based sketches serve as the basis for assembly features. You can use these features in situations where assemblies share common parts but with features that are unique to the assembly.

For example, you create an assembly which was designed to accommodate several different electric motors. Each motor type requires a different hole pattern and other cutouts for routing the wiring harness. The use of assembly features would enable you to create these motor-specific features at the assembly level, thus leaving the parts that are common to all assemblies, unaffected by the feature.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals284

Page 295: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly EnvironmentPrincipleThe assembly environment in Autodesk Inventor software is virtually the same as the part modeling environment with the exception of tools that are unique to assembly modeling.

Assembly Panel Bar: Contains tools specific to assembly modeling.

Assembly Browser: Lists all parts and their constraints. When a part is activated for editing, the browser functions are identical to the part modeling environment.

Assembly Coordinate Elements: Identical to the part environment, each assembly also contains an independent coordinate system. Expand the Origin folder to expose the origin planes, axes, and center point.

Assembly Components: Each component in the assembly is listed. Expand the components to expose the assembly constraints that have been applied.

3D Indicator: Displays the current view orientation relative to the assembly coordinate system.

Assembly Coordinate SystemEach assembly file contains an independent coordinate system. Default coordinate system elements are aligned with the 0,0,0 point in the assembly and can be used as you build the assembly. When you place the first part into the assembly, the origin point of the part file will be matched to the origin point of the assembly file. Note: This only applies if the first part in the assembly is placed into, and not created from scratch in the context of the assembly.

Assembly Modeling Environment

285Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 296: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly Panel BarProcedureSimilar to the Part Modeling Panel Bar, the Assembly Panel Bar contains the tools specific to assembly modeling. As you create your assembly model, the Panel Bar will automatically switch between Assembly, Part, and Sketch modes depending on the context you are using.

Note the keyboard shortcuts next to each icon. Enter these key sequences to start the related tool.

After you become familiar with the assembly tool icons, you can switch the panel bar to expert mode. At the top of the panel bar, select the Assembly Panel drop-down, then select Expert.

By setting the Panel Bar to expert mode, you will make more room available for the Assembly/Part browser.

Assembly Panel Bar

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals286

Page 297: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Introduction to Assembly ModelingPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will create a basic assembly model using some of the concepts mentioned in this lesson. Some techniques performed during this lesson will be covered in greater detail later in this chapter.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling

Fundamentals

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Completed Assembly

287Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 298: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly BrowserOverview

Overview

OverviewThe Assembly Browser offers several options for working in the assembly environment and is your primary tool for interacting with the assembly components and features.

In this lesson you will learn about the various options available through the Assembly Browser.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Activate and edit parts in the context of the assembly

• Control the visibility of parts in an assembly

• Resequence and Restructure an assembly

• Create browser filters and utilize them in an assembly

• Enable and disable components in an assembly

• Identify grounded components in an assembly and how they effect other assembly components

• Create and use Design Views

5-Axis Robot Assembly

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals288

Page 299: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In-Place ActivationProcedureIn-Place Activation means you activate a part in the context of the assembly. In order to edit a part in the context of the assembly, you must activate the part. There are a few options available for activating a part in-place.

• In the Browser or graphics window, double-click on the part.

• In the Browser or graphics window, right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu click Edit.

• In the Browser or graphics window, right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu click Open. This option will open the part in a separate window. Any changes to the part are automatically reflected in the assembly.

In-Place Activation - Shortcut Menu

289Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 300: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Result of In-Place ActivationWhen a part is activated in the context of the assembly, the assembly environment changes.

• In the Browser, the background behind all other parts is greyed.

• In the Browser, the part is automatically expanded to expose the part features.

• The Panel Bar switches to display the modeling tools.

• In the graphics window, the non-active parts are dimmed.

Assembly Browser - Active Part and Active Part in the Context of the Assembly

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals290

Page 301: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Visibility ControlProcedureIt is possible to control the visibility of all elements in the assembly. While you work in the context of the assembly, in the Assembly Browser or graphics window, right-click on an element in the assembly and select Visibility on the shortcut menu. Check mark indicates the part is currently visible.

Browser AppearanceIn the Assembly browser, parts with the visibility property turned off appear grey.

Browser Part Visibility

291Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 302: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly ResequenceProcedureIt is possible to resequence the order of parts in the assembly. Parts are displayed in the browser in the order in which they are placed or created. Resequencing the assembly enables you to place the parts in a more logical order.

To resequence the assembly, in the browser, click and drag on the part and release the mouse at its new position.

Assembly RestructureProcedureAs you create your assembly, at some point you may need to organize the assembly by placing components into subassemblies. By restructuring the assembly you are creating subassemblies and placing existing parts into the subassembly.

Access MethodsThe following methods are available for restructuring your assembly.

Assembly Resequencing

Shortcut Menu In the browser or graphics window, select one or more parts then right-click on a part and select Demote

Keyboard Shortcut Select one or more parts and press TAB

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals292

Page 303: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

When you restructure an assembly using the Demote tool, the Create In-Place Component dialog box appears.

New File Name: Enter a file name for the subassembly.

New File Location: Enter or browse the location for the new subassembly.

Template: Select a template to use for the new subassembly.

Assembly Restructure Constraint Warning

When restructuring parts into subassemblies, there is a potential that you will loose some assembly constraints during the restructuring process. When possible, you should restructure all parts to be included in the subassembly, at the same time. If you restructure the parts separately you will loose the assembly constraints and will need to recreate them.

To restructure all parts in one step, select all the parts in the browser or graphics window and then select the Demote tool. This will place all selected parts into the new subassembly and maintain the constraints. Constraints applied to parts residing in the same assembly will be maintained if they are restructured into a new subassembly at the same time. Constraints applied to parts residing in different assemblies and subassemblies will not be maintained.

Create In-Place Dialog Box

Assembly Restructure Constraint Warning Dialog Box

293Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 304: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Drag and Drop RestructuringIf a subassembly already exists, it is possible to restructure the assembly by dragging parts from the top level assembly to the subassembly. It is also possible to drag and drop parts from the subassembly to the top level assembly.

Depending on the constraint conditions, you may loose assembly constraints using this method.

Drag and Drop Restructuring

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals294

Page 305: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Browser FiltersProcedureYou can filter the display of information in the browser by using the browser filters. As your assembly grows in complexity, the browser filters can assist you by streamlining its information. At the top of the Assembly Browser, click the Filter button and the filter menu is displayed.

Hide Work Features: Hides all work features including the Origin folders.

Show Children Only: Displays only first level children. Hides parts contained within a subassembly when the top-level assembly is active.

Hide Notes: Hides all notes attached to features.

Hide Documents: Hides inserted documents.

Hide Warnings: Hides warning symbols attached to constraints in the browser.

295Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 306: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Browser Display ModeProcedureWhen you work in an assembly the Assembly browser display mode defaults to Position View. It displays the parts and assembly constraints. You can change the display mode to Modeling View by selecting the Position Mode drop-down menu at the top of the browser. The Modeling View will display the parts and their features. This mode enables you to identify part features and activate them for editing without having to activate the part.

When you examine the images above, note the appearance of the assembly constraints while in the Position View and the part features while in Modeling View. While in the Modeling View, note also the Constraints folder at the top. Expand this folder to expose the assembly constraints.

Assembly Browser Display Modes

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals296

Page 307: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Enabled ComponentsConceptBy default, when you place components into an assembly, they are enabled. When a component is enabled you have access to the component for editing and applying constraints. When a component is not enabled, it appears dimmed in the graphics window and its icon color in the browser changes to green.

When you open an assembly, the data structure of enabled components is available while components that are not enabled, only the graphics information is loaded. For large assemblies this is beneficial to increasing overall system performance.

In the browser or graphics window, right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu, click Enabled. A check mark indicates the part is currently enabled.

Assembly with Component Not Enabled

297Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 308: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Grounded ComponentsConceptBy default, the first part in each assembly is grounded. All degrees of freedom are removed from the component and it cannot be moved. When you apply constraints to a grounded component, the non-grounded component will move to validate the constraint while the grounded component remains fixed in its position.

Although the first part is grounded, there is no limit to the number of grounded parts that you can have in an assembly. You can also remove the grounded property from the first part in the assembly.

When you ground parts you can use them to mimic real-world situation where some parts are fixed in position, while others will move relative to the parts to which they have been constrained.

Grounded components appear in the browser with the Push Pin icon.

In the browser or graphics window, right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu, click Grounded.

Grounded Components in Browser

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals298

Page 309: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Design ViewsProcedureWhen you create a new assembly file, a separate Design View file is automatically created. Design Views are used to store assembly display configurations that you can recall the next time you work on the assembly.

Several different properties are stored within the design view. For example, as you work on an assembly, you may need to turn the visibility off of several components to work on parts internally. If you save the display configuration as a new design view, you can recall that configuration by activating the design view.

You can also use Design views as the basis for Drawing and Presentation views.

Design Views are stored in the same directory as the assembly and by default have the same name as the assembly with an *.idv extension

The following properties are stored within design view.

• Component visibility (visible or not visible)

• Sketch and work feature visibility

• Component enabled status

• Color and style properties applied in the assembly

• Zoom and viewing angle

• Browser display mode (Position or Modeling)

Access MethodsThe following methods are available for accessing Design Views.

Each Design View file can contain multiple design views. By default there will be three design views created.

• system.nothing visible: Built-in design view that when activated will turn the visibility of all components off.

• system.all visible: Built-in design view that when activated will turn the visibility of all components on.

• UserName.default: This design view is automatically created and is based

Browser Menu Area

Pull Down Menu View > Design Views

299Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 310: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

upon your system user name.

Storage Location: Represents the current storage location for the design view file.

New: Click to create a new design view file.

Browse: Click to browse for a design view file.

Design View: Lists the name of the currently selected design view. Enter a new design view name.

Save: Click to save the current display configuration as a design view.

Delete: Click to delete the selected design view.

Apply: Click to activate the selected design view.

Design Views Dialog Box

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals300

Page 311: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Assembly BrowserPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will open an assembly file and use the Assembly Browser to perform several tasks.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling

Fundamentals

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Assembly Browser

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

5-Axis Robot Assembly

301Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 312: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Placing Components in an AssemblyOverview

Overview

OverviewAs you create assemblies you place component geometry that represents the assembly's individual parts. In this lesson you will learn about several different ways you can place components into an assembly.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Use the Place Component tool to place parts into an assembly

• Utilize sources other than Autodesk Inventor software to place components

• Drag components into an assembly

• Replace components in an assembly

Completed Robot Assembly

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals302

Page 313: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Place Component ToolProcedureYou use the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly. Select this tool and the Open dialog box will be displayed. The same options for opening files are available, however the end result is the selected file will be placed into the assembly file instead of opened for editing.

The first component you place into the assembly will be automatically placed at the assembly's origin point (0,0,0) and will be grounded. You can place additional occurrences of the part by clicking different locations in the graphics window. After you place the part into the assembly, right-click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Place Component tool.

Select the file to place into the assembly and click Open.

To place files other than Autodesk Inventor software files, select the file type in the Files of type drop-down list.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu

Keyboard Shortcut P

Open Dialog Box

303Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 314: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Placing Components - Process OverviewThe following steps are an overview for using the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly.

1. Open or create a new assembly file.2. On the Panel Bar, click the Place Component tool.3. In the Open dialog box, select the file you want to place into the assembly, and

click Open.

4. The first component in the assembly is positioned automatically and is grounded. Optionally place additional components by clicking other locations in the graphics window, or press ESC to cancel.

5. On the Panel Bar, click the Place Component tool and continue to place components into the assembly.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals304

Page 315: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Sources of Placed ComponentsConceptAs you use Autodesk Inventor software to build assemblies you can use geometry from other applications as parts in your assembly. The following list represents the supported formats that you can place into an assembly.

• Autodesk Inventor parts and assemblies. (*.ipt, *.iam)

• Autodesk Mechanical Desktop (*.dwg)

• AutoCAD (*.dwg)

• SAT files (*.sat) (ACIS/ShapeManager)

• IGES files (*.igs, *.ige, *.iges)

• STEP files (*.stp, *.ste, *.step)

• Pro Engineer (*.prt, *.asm)

Different capabilities are available with each of these formats. Some formats will be converted to Autodesk Inventor files when placed into an assembly, but others such as Autodesk Mechanical Desktop will be linked to the assembly. Any changes in the Autodesk Mechanical Desktop file, would be reflected in the assembly.

Supported File TypesIn the Open dialog box, select the Files of type drop-down list to display the supported file types.

Supported Formats

305Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 316: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The image above represents an Autodesk Mechanical Desktop part used in an Autodesk Inventor assembly. Right-click on the part and then select Open to open the part in Autodesk Mechanical Desktop. Changes to the part would be reflected in the assembly.

Mechanical Desktop Parts in an Autodesk Inventor Assembly

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals306

Page 317: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Dragging Components into an AssemblyProcedureYou can drag components into an assembly from other open part files or from Windows Explorer. This results in the component being placed into the assembly just as if you had used the Place Component tool.

In the image below, the active part file, robo_hand.ipt is being dragged into the non-active but open assembly.

In the image below, a component is being dragged into the assembly from a Windows Explorer window.

Dragging an Open Part File into an Assembly

Dragging Components from Windows Explorer

307Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 318: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

When you drag components from a Windows Explorer window, make certain the location of the component is referenced in the current Project file. If not, the following message will appear.

The message means that the current location is not referenced in the Project file. As a result Autodesk Inventor may not be able to locate the file the next time the assembly is opened.

Click OK to place the component in the assembly. If you place the component in the assembly, you must edit the Project paths before re-opening the assembly to include component location or move the component to a location identified within the current project.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals308

Page 319: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Replacing ComponentsProcedureAs you build assemblies, you may need to replace components. For example when you start the assembly, you may not have access to all the required parts. In the meantime you place a proxy part in place of the final part. After you receive the required geometry, you can use the Replace tool to replace the proxy part with the final version.

When you replace components in an assembly, some assembly constraints will be lost and need to be recreated. Autodesk Inventor software will attempt to retain the constraints, but the result depends largely on the differences in geometry between the existing component and the replacement component.

When the component is replaced, the new version is placed in the same location as the existing version. The origin of the new component is coincident with the origin of the component being replaced.

There are two versions of the Replace component tool:

- Replaces only the selected component.

- Replaces all occurrences of the selected component.

Access MethodsThe following methods are available for access the Replace component tool.

When you replace components in an assembly the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box will appear. Click OK to continue and replace the selected component, or click Cancel to cancel the operation.

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut CTRL+H > Replace

SHIFT+H > Replace All

Possible Constraint Loss Dialog Box

309Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 320: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Replacing Components - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for replacing components.

1. In the browser or graphics window, select the component to be replaced.

2. On the Panel Bar, click the Replace component tool and in the Open dialog box, double-click on the replacement component. If the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box appears, click OK to replace the component.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals310

Page 321: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. To replace multiple occurrences of the same part, select one of the occurrences and on the Panel Bar, click the Replace All tool.

4. In the Open dialog box, double-click on the replacement component.5. Click OK in the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box.

6. All occurrences of the selected component are replaced.

311Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 322: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Placing Components in an AssemblyPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you use the techniques covered in this lesson to place components into a new assembly. After you place the components, you will use the Replace Component tool to replace components in the assembly.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling

Fundamentals

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Completed Robot Assembly

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals312

Page 323: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Components in an AssemblyOverview

Overview

OverviewCreating components in an assembly enables you to design parts in the context of the assembly in which they will reside. This technique enables you to take advantage of other part features in the assembly to create new geometry and validate this new geometry based upon the design intent.

In this lesson you will learn how to create components in the context of an assembly.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Create parts in the context of the assembly

• Use work features in assemblies

• Use 2D sketches in an assembly

• Use projected edges and features

Components Created In-Place

313Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 324: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Parts in PlaceProcedureCreating parts in the context of the assembly enables you to take advantage of other geometry in the assembly by referencing the features of other parts to assist in the creation of new parts. Commonly referred to as Top-Down assembly modeling, this approach enables you to design new parts in the assembly environment in which they will reside.

Benefits to Creating Parts in PlaceThe following list represents some of the benefits of creating parts in the context of the assembly.

• Ability to reference other parts in the assembly.

• Ability to validate function within the assembly.

• Ability to create adaptive relationships between parts.

• Presents a better picture of the overall design intent.

Access MethodsThe following methods are available for accessing the Create Component tool.

Example of Creating a Part in Place

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut N

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals314

Page 325: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

New FIle Name: Enter a name for the new file.

File Type: Select the file type in the drop-down list.

• Part: Select to create a new part file.

• Assembly: Select to create subassembly.

New File Location: Enter the location for the new part or assembly file.

Template: Select a template to use for the new part or assembly file.

Browse: Click to browse for a template file.

Constrain sketch plane to selected face or plane: Selecting this option will place a flush constraint between the new part and the selected face.

Creating Parts and Subassemblies in Place - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating parts and subassemblies in place.

1. Open an existing, or create a new, assembly.2. On the Panel Bar, click the Create Component tool and enter the required values

in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. Click OK to create the new part.

Create In-Place Component Dialog Box

315Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 326: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Select a face or plane to define the initial sketch plane on the new part.

4. Use the sketching tools available to create new sketch geometry or project geometry from other parts in the assembly.

5. Use part modeling tools to create the 3D geometry.

6. To create a subassembly in-place:

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals316

Page 327: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

7. On the Panel Bar, click the Create Component tool and enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. Click OK to create the new subassembly.

8. Select a face or plane to orient the new subassembly's origin.

9. The subassembly is automatically activated. You can now create new parts in the context of the subassembly or place components that have already been created.

317Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 328: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using Work Features in AssembliesConceptAs you create components in the context of the assembly, remember that the assembly file contains it own coordinate system and origin work features. You can use them to orient sketch planes on new parts and they can serve as the basis for additional work features in new parts.

You will also find the Work Plane, Work Axis, and Work Point tools to create new assembly based work features.

Assembly Work Feature Being Used

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals318

Page 329: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using 2D SketchesProcedureYou can use 2D sketches in the assembly while you create new parts and validate design intent. As you do, it is not necessary to create 3D features in the initial design phases. You can create the fundamental sketch geometry you need to validate certain features and then exit the part and assign assembly constraints to the 2D parts in the same way you apply constraints to 3D features.

Using this technique enables you to validate the part's intended function before spending the time required to develop the parts final form.

Using 2D Sketches in the Assembly - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for using 2D Sketches in an assembly.

1. Create a new part in the context of the assembly and use the sketching tools to create only the geometry required to validate function.

Constraint Dragging 2D Parts in an Assembly

319Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 330: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2. Exit the part and return to the assembly environment. Apply assembly constraints between the new 2D part and the existing parts.

3. If required, create additional parts containing 2D geometry and constrain as required.

4. Validate the components by constraint dragging the 2D parts and/or editing dimensions and/or other constraints.

5. The 2D parts will react in the assembly the same way as a fully developed 3D part.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals320

Page 331: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using Projected Edges and FeaturesProcedureUsing the same tools to project edges and features in a single part file, you can project edges and features from other parts in the assembly. You can also use this projected geometry to create features on the current part. Using this technique, you can create parts within the assembly with matching or uniform features.

When you project 2D geometry across parts in the assembly, the resulting geometry will either be associative reference geometry or static reference geometry. Each type offers unique benefits and drawbacks, some of which are beyond the scope of this course.

The biggest difference between associative or static reference geometry is what happens to the projected geometry if the originating feature changes. Associative reference geometry maintains a link to the original part and changes if the feature from which it was projected changes. Static reference geometry is not linked back to the originating part and will not change if the source features change.

The following table represents some key differences between Associative Reference geometry and Static Reference geometry.

For more information on the use of projected geometry, refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help system.

Projecting Edges and FeaturesThe follow methods are available for accessing the tools to project edges and features.

Associative Reference Static Reference

Receiving part is adaptive Receiving part is not adaptive

Degrees of freedom on receiving part are reduced.

Degrees of freedom on receiving part are not effected.

Geometry cannot be trimmed or dimensioned

Geometry cannot be trimmed or dimensioned

Panel Bar

321Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 332: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

To enable or disable the associative reference geometry, on the Tools menu click Application Options. In the Options dialog box, click the Assembly tab and adjust the option accordingly.

Cross Part Geometry Projection: Selecting this option will create associative reference geometry. Clearing this option will create static reference geometry. If this option is chosen Autodesk Inventor will assign an Adaptive status to the current part and active sketch. Although this adds a degree of flexibility in regards to the design process, it also adds a certain level of complexity to managing the geometry. Adaptivity will be introduced later in this chapter.

In the image below, the projected geometry is associative. Note the appearance in the browser and the adaptive icon associated with the adaptive sketch, feature and part.

Options Dialog Box - Assembly Tab (Partial)

Projected Associative Reference Geometry

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals322

Page 333: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In the image below, projected geometry is static. Note the appearance of the sketch in the browser. There is no adaptive icon or linked reference to the sketch. When projecting cross-part geometry, static reference geometry is magenta, while associative reference geometry is black.

Projected Static Reference Geometry

323Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 334: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly

Print Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will open an assembly and create new components using the techniques learned in this lesson. You will create additional parts in place and project geometry from other parts in the assembly. You will use the 2D sketch geometry to validate assembly function before creating the 3D features.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling

Fundamentals

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Components Created In-Place

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals324

Page 335: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Moving ComponentsOverview

Overview

OverviewThere are several methods available for moving components in an assembly. The method you choose will largely depend upon the constraint condition of the components and/or the task you need to accomplish.

In this lesson you will learn how to move components in an assembly.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Identify the remaining degrees of freedom on a part, and how they are affected by constraints

• Perform an unconstrained drag

• Perform a constrained drag

• Drive assembly constraints

• Move and rotate components in an assembly

Robot Assembly Before Driving Constraints

325Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 336: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Degrees of FreedomConceptEach component in an assembly will initially have six degrees of freedom (DOF). They represent how you can move the component along or rotated about each of the X, Y, and Z axes. The degrees of freedom that enable a component to move along an axis, is Translational freedom, while the degrees of freedom that enable a part to rotate about an axis is Rotational freedom.

As you apply assembly constraints to components, you reduce the degrees of freedom for the components being constrained. When a part has no degrees of freedom remaining, it is considered to be fully constrained. You do not have to fully constrain any component in the assembly.

In some cases you do not want to fully constrain a component. For example, if you have an assembly with components that are designed to move along a given axis, then you should leave the degrees of freedom to allow that movement.

The image above represents the DOF symbol that can be viewed on each part in the assembly.

How to View a Components Degrees of FreedomThere are two methods available for viewing the DOF symbol on components in the assembly.

• To view the DOF symbols on all components in the assembly, on the View menu, click Degrees of Freedom or enter SHIFT+E.

• To view individual component's DOF symbol, right-click on the component, and on the shortcut menu, click Properties. In the Properties dialog box, click the Occurrence tab and select the Degrees of Freedom option.

Degrees of Freedom Symbol

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals326

Page 337: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Effect of Constraints on Degrees of FreedomThe following steps represent the effect of assembly constraints on degrees of freedom.

1. A grounded component has no degrees of freedom. The unconstrained component has all six degrees of freedom remaining.

2. Mate constraint being applied. Three degrees of freedom are removed, three remain.

3. Flush constraint being applied. Two degrees of freedom removed, one remains.

4. Flush constraint being applied. No remaining degrees of freedom. Part is fully constrained.

Note

Grounded ComponentsWhen components are grounded in an assembly, all degrees of freedom are removed. Because the first part in each assembly is automatically grounded, it has no degrees of freedom remaining.

327Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 338: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Unconstrained DragProcedureYou can move unconstrained components by dragging them in the graphics window. It is sometimes necessary to move components in order to place assembly constraints.

Constrained DragProcedureTo perform a constrained drag you click and drag on a component that is constrained in the assembly. You are able to drag the component in the directions allowed by the remaining degrees of freedom. Other components constrained to the selected component will also move based upon their remaining degrees of freedom.

Unconstrained Drag

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals328

Page 339: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Constraint DriversProcedureAs you build assemblies and add constraints to the parts, you may need to visualize the assembly in motion to see how the components interact with each other. Driving constraints makes this visualization possible.

When you create assembly constraints, each constraint type contains a property representing an offset or angle value. When you drive a constraint, these values are assigned a Start and End value. You animate the assembly by driving the constraints through the range specified.

While you drive the constraint, other assembly constraints are constantly evaluated and the assembly components are only allowed to move through the available degrees of freedom for each component.

Access MethodsThe following methods are available for accessing the Drive Constraints tool.

Start: Enter a minimum value for the current constraint. For angular constraint, this value will be an angle format, for all other constraints, this value will represent a distance.

End: Enter a maximum value for the current constraint.

Pause Delay: Enter a delay in seconds to be applied between steps.

Shortcut Menu Right-click on a constraint and select Drive Constraint

Drive Constraint Dialog Box

329Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 340: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Player Controls: Use the standard player controls to drive the constraint through its sequence.

Click to record the sequence to a standard AVI format.

Minimize dialog during recording: When selected, the dialog box will be minimized while recording the sequence.

Drive Adaptivity: When selected, will allow adaptive parts to update if necessary based upon changes in the assembly.

Collision Detection: When selected, the assembly is analyzed for interference as each component moves through its sequence. If a collision is detected, the motion is stopped at the point of interference.

Increment: Select the method for calculating the increment of simulation.

• Amount of value: Uses the value below to increment each step of the sequence.

• Total # of steps: Uses the value below for the total number of steps for the sequence.

• Value: Enter a value for the increment method.

Repetitions:

• Start/End: Runs the sequence from its Start position to its End position.

• Start/End/Start: Runs the sequence from its Start position to its End position and back to its Start position.

AVI rate: Specifies frame rate when recording the simulation.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals330

Page 341: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Driving Constraints - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for driving assembly constraints.

1. In the browser, right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Drive Constraint.

2. In the Drive constraint dialog box, enter a Start and End value, adjust other settings as required and click the Play button to drive the constraint.

3. The assembly constraint is driven through its Start and End positions.

Note

Driving More Than One ConstraintAlthough it is beyond the scope of this course, through the use of parameters and formulas it is possible to drive more than one constraint at a time. Refer to the Advanced Assembly Modeling course from Autodesk, Inc. for more information.

331Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 342: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Moving and Rotating ComponentsProcedureTo move constrained components in an assembly to facilitate adding additional constraints you use either Move Component or Rotate Component tools. When you use these tools on a component in the assembly, the assembly constraints are temporarily ignored, enabling you to move or rotate the components independently from the degrees of freedom that may be remaining on the part. Using these tools, you can move components in the assembly just as if they were not constrained at all.

To move or rotate a component in the assembly, select the appropriate tool then click and drag on the part being moved or rotated.

After you move or rotate the component click the Update button on the Standard toolbar to reapply the assembly constraints.

Access MethodsThe following methods are available for accessing the Move and Rotate Component tools.

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcuts V = Move

G = Rotate

Rotating Components - Potential Cursors

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals332

Page 343: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

When you rotate components, the 3D Rotate symbol appears similar to the 3D Rotate symbol when rotating views. Click and drag in the appropriate location to rotate the component.

Note

Moving or Rotating Grounded ComponentsIf you move or rotate a grounded component, it will not move back to its original location after performing an Update.

333Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 344: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Moving ComponentsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will open an assembly and view the available degrees of freedom on different components. You will then use the techniques learned in this lesson to move the components and drive assembly constraints.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling

Fundamentals

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Moving Components

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Robot Assembly Before Driving Constraints

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals334

Page 345: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Constraining ComponentsOverview

Overview

OverviewWhen you build assemblies you define parametric relationships between the parts in the assembly. The relationships created between parts using assembly constraints, realistically mimics real-world situations and operating conditions of the assembly components.

You apply assembly constraints to the parts to define their position and available degrees of freedom. You use the Constraint tool or the ALT-Drag method to apply constraints without using the Place Constraint dialog box.

After you apply the constraints, there are a couple of ways to view the constraints in the browser, and if necessary edit the constraints.

In this lesson you will learn how to apply, view, and edit assembly constraints.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Understand how assembly constraints effect individual parts in the assembly

• Apply and edit basic assembly constraints in the assembly

• View assembly constraints in the browser

• Use the ALT-Drag method to apply assembly constraints

LCD-Mount Assembly

335Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 346: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Placing ConstraintsConceptYou apply each assembly constraint to either two components in the assembly or to one component and one assembly origin feature. When you start the Constraint tool, after you select the type of constraint, you will select one feature on each part to apply it. The geometry that you choose is dependent upon the type of constraint you apply. The features to which the constraints are applied can be geometric part features, or work features (work planes, axes, or points) at the assembly or part level.

There are four types of assembly constraints that can be applied between parts: mate, angle, tangent, an insert. The constraint type chosen will depend upon the part features and the design intent.

Simple but completeWhen you apply assembly constraints to parts, you should apply the constraints using the simplest approach possible while using constraint solutions that will constrain the parts as completely as required by the design intent.

You are not required to fully constrain parts in the assembly, but parts should not be left unconstrained, or with constraint conditions that do not fully represent the intended function of the part in the assembly. If a component in an assembly is not intended to be constrained to other components, then it should be grounded or constrained to assembly level work features.

As you plan the constraints, mimic the real world conditions of the parts in the assembly by using assembly constraint solutions that most closely resemble how the parts will be assembled after manufacturing. Using this approach enables you to develop an assembly of parts that interact as intended with other parts in the assembly.

Example of Assembly Constraint

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals336

Page 347: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In the image below, you could use a variety of different constraint solutions to assemble these two components. However after analyzing how the components will be put together, the proper constraint is used to mimic the real world process of assembling the two components.

Example of Proper Constraint Planning

Tip

Placing Constraints on Obstructed GeometryWhen placing constraints on obstructed geometry or features, on the Standard toolbar, select the Hidden Edge Display options to display all edges on the parts.

337Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 348: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

How to Place Constraints - Process OverviewAlthough each type of constraint will create a different result, the overall process of applying constraints is the same. The following steps represent an overview for applying constraints.

1. Open or create an assembly.

2. On the Panel Bar, click the Constraint tool and select the type of constraint to apply.

3. Select the features to apply the constraints. Depending on the type of constraint, and the geometry chosen, you are given a preview of how the constraint will be applied.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals338

Page 349: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

4. If necessary adjust the solution option and enter an offset or angle value.

5. Click apply to create the constraint then continue to add additional constraints as required.

6. Additional constraints being applied.

339Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 350: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Basic ConstraintsProcedureThere are four basic assembly constraints. Each are designed to create a certain constraint condition between the components in the assembly.

Type: Select the type of constraint to create.

Selections: As you select features, the selection1 and selection2 buttons are automatically activated. If you need to change a selected feature, click the appropriate selection button and reselect the geometry.

Pick Part First: This option limits the feature selections to the selected part. You must first select the part, then select the feature for the constraint. This option is usually used in situations where the feature you are attempting to constrain is obstructed by other parts in the assembly.

Offset/Angle: The label for this field will change depending on the type of constraint you select. Enter a value for the offset or angle of the constraint.

Solution: Each constraint type offers different solutions. Refer to the section below for available solution options for each.

Preview Constraint: This option previews the constraint before applying. The components will move into position, enabling you to preview the constraint and confirm or change the constraint settings.

Predict Offset and Orientation: Only available for Mate and Angle constraints, this option automatically inserts the angle or offset value if the offset field is blank. The offset or angle value is calculated based upon the

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut C

Place Constraint Dialog Box

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals340

Page 351: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

part's current position and is inserted into the offset/angle field. To override this setting, enter the offset/angle value manually. This is useful in applying constraints without moving the geometry from its current position.

Mate Constraint You use the mate constraint to mate selected geometry. Valid selections include faces, planes, axes, edges, and points. You can also enter an offset value to offset the geometry.

Solution Options:

Mate: Selected geometry will be mated to each other.

Flush: Selected faces will be coplanar.

The following represents examples using the Mate constraint.

Mate Constraint/Mate Solution - Axis/Axis

Mate Constraint/Mate Solution - Face/Face

341Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 352: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Mate Constraint/Mate Solution - Point/Point

Mate Constraint/Flush Solution - Face/Face

Angle Constraint Use the angle constraint to specify an angle between faces, planes, or lines.

Solution Options:

Directed Angle: Using this solution option, the angle is measured by using the right-hand rule.

Undirected Angle: This is the default solution and it allows either orientation of the angle constraint. This helps resolve situations in which the component's orientation flips during a constraint drive or drag.

Angle Constraint - Face/Face

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals342

Page 353: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Tangent Constraint Use the tangent constraint to define a tangency condition between one circular feature and plane or face, or between two circular features.

Solution Options:

Inside: Creates an inside tangent solution.

Outside: Creates an outside tangent solution.

Tangent Constraint/Outside Solution - Circular Face - Circular Face:

Insert ConstraintUse the insert constraint to insert a circular part feature into another circular part feature. This requires the selection of two circular edges. The center point of the edge is calculated and the result is a constraint in which the center lines are

aligned and the selected edges are made coplanar.

Solution Options:

Opposed: This solution will force the face normals to be opposed.

Aligned: This solution will align the face normals.

Insert Constraint

343Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 354: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Viewing ConstraintsProcedureAfter you create the assembly constraints you can view them in the browser different ways. If you select a constraint in the browser it will highlight the geometry referenced by the constraint.

Constraint Geometry Highlighted

Browser - Position ViewWhen you create assembly constraints, each part or origin feature is associated with one-half of the constraint; for example, when the browser is in the default Position View. Each constraint is listed twice in the browser.

This image displays how the assembly constraint appears under each part that it has been applied. If you need to edit, suppress, or delete a constraint, you can access the constraint under either part.

Viewing Assembly Constraints in the Browser

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals344

Page 355: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Browser - Modeling ViewIf you change the browser view to Modeling View, the constraints appear under the Constraints folder. You can expand the folder to access the constraints. Using this view places all the constraints in one location however, it can be difficult to identify constraints on specific parts in larger assemblies.

Shortcut Menu OptionsIn the browser, if you right-click on a constraint the following shortcut menu is displayed.

Find in Window: Zooms the current view to geometry containing the selected constraint. This assists you in identifying the constraint graphically.

Other Half: This option highlights the other half of the constraint, by expanding the other component to which it has been applied and highlighting the constraint. This option helps identify which components the constraint has been applied to.

Assembly Constraints in Browser - Modeling View

Constraint Shortcut Menu Options

345Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 356: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing ConstraintsProcedureYou can edit the constraint much the same way you edit placed features. Locate the constraint in the browser, then right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Edit.

When you edit a constraint, all edits are done in the same dialog box used to create the constraint. All options can be changed including the type of constraint.

Editing Constraints

Editing Constraints

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals346

Page 357: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Changing the Constraint Offset/Angle ValueThere are two methods to change the constraint offset/angle value without using the Edit Constraint dialog box.

• Using the Edit Box at the bottom of the browser: Selecting a constraint will cause the Edit Box to appear at the bottom of the browser. Enter a new offset/angle value for the constraint and press ENTER.

• Using the Edit Dimension dialog box: In the browser, right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Modify. The Edit Dimension dialog box will appear. Enter a new offset/angle value and press ENTER or click the green check mark.

347Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 358: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using ALT-Drag to Place ConstraintsProcedureThe ALT-Drag method is an alternate method for placing assembly constraints. Hold the ALT key down, then click and drag on the feature receiving the constraint. A constraint glyph will appear indicating the type of constraint being applied. Continue to drag the cursor to another part in the assembly and touch another valid feature. Then release the mouse button to create the assembly constraint.

ALT-Drag Constraint TypesWhen you use the ALT-Drag method to apply constraints, the constraint type is based upon the geometry you select. You can change the constraint type by pressing the appropriate key. Release the ALT key but you must continue to hold down the left mouse button.

• Mate: M or 1

• Angle: A or 2

• Tangent: T or 3

• Insert: I or 4

ALT-Drag Constraint Glyph

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals348

Page 359: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

ALT-Drag to Place Constraints - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for using the ALT-Drag method to apply assembly constraints.

1. While holding the ALT key, select the feature to be constrained and while holding the left mouse button down, drag the part. You can release the ALT key but you must hold the mouse button down.

2. While holding the mouse button down, drag the part to the next feature to assign

the constraint and release the mouse when the part is in place.

349Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 360: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Constraining ComponentsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you use the concepts and techniques learned in this lesson to constrain components in the assembly. After you apply the constraints you will edit some constraints to see the effect on the assembly.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling

Fundamentals

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Constraining Components

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

LCD-Mount Assembly

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals350

Page 361: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Adaptive ComponentsOverview

Overview

OverviewAdaptivity is intended to give the designer a way to create parts that can adapt to the assembly in which they are being used. Historically, parametric modeling systems required the use of complex cross-part parametric equations in order for one part to change size if another part in the assembly changed. One problem with this technique, is that cross-part parametric equations could become so complex, that even the original designer could have problems managing the relationship and equations used in such an environment.

With the introduction of Adaptivity, Autodesk Inventor enables the designer to create adaptive relationships between parts in an assembly, that do not require the use of complex cross-part parameters. Largely based upon assembly constraints, Adaptivity enables a part to change based upon changes in other parts in the assembly to which it has been constrained. Furthermore, with Autodesk Inventor you can mix both Parametric dimensions and adaptivity within the same part and/or assembly. Thus, you can control the design intent by using the most appropriate technique.

Although an in depth discussion of Adaptivity is beyond the scope of the course, you will learn the essential aspects of creating adaptive assemblies using Autodesk Inventor.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Understand adaptive features and how you use them

• Create adaptive features and sketches

• Use adaptive occurrences in an assembly and control them with constraints

Completed Assembly with Adaptive Parts

351Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 362: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Introduction to Adaptive FeaturesConceptAdaptivity is not intended to be used in all parts and assemblies. The key to using adaptive features effectively is knowing when to use them.

When you create a part containing adaptive features, their size is allowed to change when the assembly conditions require them to do so in order to successfully resolve constraints and associative sketches.

You can use different approaches to create adaptive features, for example, you can design the part outside of the assembly and make specific features adaptive for later use, or create a part in the context of the assembly, and project geometry from other parts in the assembly, to automatically create adaptive features.

In the example below, the gasket component was created by using an adaptive cross-part projection from the flange component. By changing dimensions on the flange component, the gasket features change to match the changes on the flange.

Identifying Adaptive Parts and FeaturesParts and features are identified in the browser with an adaptive icon indicating the adaptive status. It must be present at each level in order for adaptivity to function. At minimum you will have two adaptive indicators: (a) at the part level in the assembly, and (b) at the feature level. The adaptive indicator only appears at the sketch level if the sketch contains associative geometry or has been set to be adaptive.

Adaptive Component - Before and After

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals352

Page 363: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

When to Use Adaptive FeaturesThe following list represents some of the occasions to use adaptivity.

• Your part contains features that are largely dependent for size or position, with other parts in the assembly.

• Your parts share common sketch geometry such as mating flanges.

• You need an easy way to update parts in the assembly when changes are required.

353Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 364: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Methods for Creating Adaptive FeaturesProcedureThere are two methods available for creating adaptive features. The method you choose depends upon the design intent and which aspects of the geometry needs to be adaptive. While some adaptive features may only require certain parameters, such as extrusion distance, to change others may require the underlying sketch geometry to change as well.

• Using an associative reference sketch to create a feature. When you create parts in the context of the assembly, you can project geometry from other parts onto the current sketch. Depending upon the current Application Options settings, this geometry will either be associative reference or static. When the result of the geometry you project is associative reference geometry, the sketch is automatically set to be adaptive and any changes to the originating geometry will reflect in the reference geometry.To access this setting, on the Tools menu, click Application Options and click the Assembly tab.

Use Associative Reference Sketches to

• Create a new component with features that need to mate with other features in the assembly.

• Create a new component with features whose size and position are dependent upon the features of other parts in the assembly. For example a flange and end cap.

• Create features that mate with a zero clearance.• Create an underconstrained feature, and then make it adaptive.

You create the sketch geometry and intentionally leave the geometry underconstrained. In order for a sketch feature to adapt, it must be underconstrained specifically on the elements of the sketch that you require to be adaptive. After you create the feature, in the browser, right-click on the

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals354

Page 365: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

feature and click Adaptive on the shortcut menu.

Assign specific feature properties as adaptive. Each feature you create has specific properties can be set as adaptive. For example, a hole feature has the following properties that can be set as adaptive.

• Sketch (must be underconstrained)• Hole Depth• Nominal Diameter• Counterbore Diameter• Counterbore Depth

• Any or all of these features can be set as adaptive in the Feature Properties dialog box.

• Use Underconstrained Adaptive Features to

• Create adaptive relationships with 2D layout sketch geometry.• Create adaptive relationships when there is no existing geometry to

project.• Create adaptive relationships before you know which parts in the

assembly you will constrain the adaptive features to.• Adapt a feature to a component in another assembly level.• Creating mating features and control assembly clearances with constraint

offset values.

355Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 366: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Adaptive SketchesProcedureYou create adaptive sketches by projecting cross-part geometry as associative reference geometry. If the originating geometry changes, the changes are automatically reflected in the referencing associative sketch.

In the image above, the Adaptive-Gasket's base feature sketch geometry is projected from the underlying flange part. If changes to the flange's sketch geometry occur, they will be automatically reflected in the projected adaptive sketch.

Creating Adaptive Sketches - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating adaptive sketches.

1. Open or create an assembly containing at least one part.

2. On the Tools menu, click Application Options. In the Options dialog box, click the Assembly tab and confirm that the Enable Associative Edge/Loop Geometry Projection During In-Place Modeling is selected, then click OK.

3. Create a new part in the context of the assembly and activate the sketch to receive to associative reference geometry. With sketch activated, on the Panel Bar, click the Project Geometry tool and select the edges or loops to be projected onto the new

Adaptive Sketch Example

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals356

Page 367: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

part. To project single edges, select the edges specifically, to project a loop, select a point inside the edges.

4. The projected geometry will appear on the sketch and in the browser as an adaptive reference.

5. Use the projected sketch geometry to create the required sketched features.

6. If necessary make changes to the original part and view the changes reflected in the adaptive part.

357Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 368: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Adaptive FeaturesProcedureYou create Adaptive features by leaving certain aspects of the feature underconstrained. By leaving the geometry underconstrained, it is able to adapt to other features based upon assembly constraints. You do this by leaving dimensions and/or constraints off of sketch geometry, or by making specific feature properties, such as an extrusion distance, adaptive.

In the image below, the adaptive part is created with the initial sketch intentionally underconstrained. Using Mate and Flush assembly constraints, the adaptive part is driven through a series of updates and changes in size.

In the browser, right-click on a feature and select Properties on the shortcut menu. The feature properties dialog box contains an Adaptive section enabling you to determine which aspects of the feature are allowed to adapt. The options available will depend upon the type of feature selected.

Adaptive Feature Example

Feature Properties Dialog Box

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals358

Page 369: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Adaptive Features - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating adaptive features.

1. Create a new part in the assembly with an underconstrained sketch.

2. Create the part as required using standard sketch features.

3. In the browser, right-click on the feature and select Adaptive from the shortcut menu.

359Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 370: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

4. Add assembly constraints according to the design intent. The adaptive part will update to validate the assembly constraint.

5. Continue to add assembly constraints as required by the design intent. The part feature updates to validate the assembly constraint.

6. Continue to add assembly constraints as required by the design intent. The part feature updates to validate the assembly constraint.

Note

Setting Initial Adaptive Feature StatusYou can set part features to be adaptive automatically as soon as they are created. On the Tools menu, click Application Options. In the Options dialog box, click the Assembly tab and select the Features are initially adaptive option.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals360

Page 371: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Adaptive Occurrence in AssembliesProcedureWhen you add a part to an assembly that was created outside of the assembly and contains adaptive features, the part's adaptive status is not initially set. To set the part as adaptive, in the browser or graphics window, right-click on the part, then click Adaptive on the shortcut menu.

When you constrain the adaptive part to fixed features on other components, the under constrained features on the adaptive part will resize to validate the assembly constraints.

In an assembly containing multiple occurrences of an adaptive part, only one occurrence can be specified as adaptive. Any changes made to the adaptive occurrence will be automatically reflected in other occurrences. When a component is being used adaptively in one assembly, it cannot be used adaptively in another. It is important to note that any changes to the adaptive part, caused by adaptivity, or other modifications, will be reflected in every assembly in which the part is used. If you require the same part to be adaptive in multiple assemblies, you can use the Save Copy As command and save the part with a unique name for each adaptive occurrence you require in other assemblies.

The image below represents two assembly files, each containing a reference to the Pin-A component. In the Adaptive-Occurrence.iam file, note that only one occurrence of the Pin-A component is set to be adaptive. All other occurrences in the assembly will update to reflect the adaptive changes. In the Tri-Assembly.iam file, the same Pin-A component is being referenced. Because it is used adaptively in the Adaptive-Occurrences.iam file, it cannot be used adaptively in this assembly. Also, changes to the Pin-A component forced by adaptivity in the first assembly, are also reflected in the second assembly. As a result, in this example, the Pin-A component no longer fits the hole size of the Tri-Base.ipt.

361Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 372: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Applying Assembly ConstraintsProcedureYou apply Assembly constraints to adaptive parts the same way you apply constraints to non-adaptive components. When you apply assembly constraints to adaptive components, the component will move according to the remaining degrees of freedom before it adapts. An adaptive change will only occur when there are no remaining degrees of freedom that can be used to validate the constraint.

The image below represents a common error that can occur when you apply constraints to adaptive components. Although the message does not give details about the specific problem, when you use adaptive parts, it means that either some aspect of the feature's properties is not specified to be adaptive, or a constraint or dimension is preventing the adaptive change to occur. When this message appears, Cancel or Accept the message, and investigate the adaptive component's features, and sketch geometry. If you click Cancel, you will have to reapply the constraint. If you click Accept, the constraint will be saved in an error state. After you resolve the adaptive issue, the constraint will be validated automatically.

Tips and Considerations for Using AdaptivityProcedureThe following list represents some tips and consideration for using Adaptivity.

• Adaptivity is not intended to be the cure all for all cross-part design challenges.

• For each adaptive part in an assembly, additional processing is required. Depending on the complexity of the assembly and parts, assembly performance can be effected.

• After the adaptive changes have been applied, turn off the adaptive status of the part in the assembly. This step is critical for performance, as any changes to a feature will force Autodesk Inventor to evaluate the adaptivity. If your assembly contains hundreds (if not thousands) of parts, then performance could be seriously effected.

Common Assembly Constraint Error

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals362

Page 373: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Adaptive ComponentsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will create three adaptive components in the assembly using both associative reference edges and adaptive features. You will then modify the Adp-Reservoir component and view the effects on the adaptive components in the assembly.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling

Fundamentals

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Adaptive Components

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Completed Assembly with Adaptive Parts

363Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 374: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly AnalysisOverview

Overview

OverviewThere are different tools available to assist you in analyzing components that are used in an assembly, and finding existing components.

In this lesson you will learn to analyze the assembly for interference between parts. You will also learn to perform different surface analyses on parts as well as using the Find option in the open dialog box to locate components based upon certain search criteria.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Analyze components in the assembly for interference

• Analyze faces on the part using the Zebra Style analysis

• Locate components using the Find option

Completed Interference Analysis

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals364

Page 375: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Analyze Interference ToolProcedureAs you design components for your assembly, you may need to determine whether or not components in the assembly interfere with each other. The Analyze Interference tool enables you to check for interference between components in the assembly.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Analyze Interference tool.

Define Set #1: Click this button then select the components to include in the first set. You can select components in the browser or in the graphics window. Components within this set will be compared against components in Set #2.

Define Set #2: Click this button then select the components to include in the second set. You can select components in the browser or in the graphics window. Components within this set will be compared against components in Set #1. Including components in this set is optional.

When the interference analysis is performed, components in Set #1 are checked for interference with components in Set #2. If you define both sets and components within the same set interfere with each other, the interference will not be detected. To check for interference by comparing each component to each other component, select all components for Set #1 and leave Set #2 empty.

Pull Down Menu Tools >

Interference Analysis Dialog Box

365Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 376: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

If interferences are detected, the Interference Detected dialog box appears, indicating the components and locations of interference. You can copy this information to the clipboard and then paste it into another application. You can also print it for further review.

Analyzing Interference - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for analyzing the assembly for interference between components.

1. Open an assembly.2. On the Tools menu, click Analyze Interference and select the components to be

included in Set #1.

Interference Detected Dialog Box

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals366

Page 377: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Click the Define Set #2 button and select the components to be compared against the components in Set #1. Then click OK.

4. If an interference is found, the Interference Detected dialog box appears giving a total number of interferences and the total volume. The areas of interference are indicated in red in the graphics window. You can expand the dialog box for more information and to copy and/or print the results.

Tip

Interference Between Threaded Holes and Standard Parts.To prevent interference between threaded holes and fasteners, use the major diameter option to create the threaded hole.

367Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 378: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Analyze Faces ToolProcedureThe Analyze Faces tool offers two different analysis styles. You use the Zebra Analysis to analyze consistency between faces and use the Draft Analysis style to analyze the suitability of a part for casting.

Each style is designed to perform specific analysis and will present the results of the analysis in a unique way.

In this lesson you will learn how to perform each of these analyses.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Analyze Faces tool.

Zebra AnalysisThe Zebra Analysis analyzes the selected part or faces by checking for continuity between surfaces.

In the Style area click the left button to activate the Zebra Analysis. You use this style to check the continuity between surfaces.

New: Click to define a new selection set of faces.

Delete: Click to delete the selection set.

Definition: Use these options to control the orientation of the pattern, thickness of the stripes, and opacity of the pattern.

Selection: In the Selection area, click the arrow button to select the part or faces.

Pull Down Menu Tools >

Standard Toolbar Toggles the analysis display on/off.

Analyze Faces Dialog Box - Zebra Analysis

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals368

Page 379: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Part: Enables you to select the entire part for analysis.

Faces: Enables you to select individual faces for analysis.

Click OK or Apply to display the results.

In the example above, the selected faces are being analyzed for continuity along their common edge. The Zebra Stripes make a uniform transition from one face to the other, indicating surface continuity. If there were gaps between the selected faces, the Zebra Stripe pattern would indicate this with a non-uniform transition from one face to the next.

Draft AnalysisYou use the Draft Analysis style to check the suitability of a part for casting. When you design parts for casting, 90 degree angles can cause problems when trying to pull the mold away from the part. Face drafts are generally used to alleviate this problem by applying slight draft angles between faces.

The Draft Analysis style analyzes the selected part or faces and presents the results in a range of colors on the selected part or faces. The colors represent the draft angle range between angles specified.

Analyze Faces Dialog Box - Draft Analysis

369Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 380: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In the Style area click the right button to activate the Draft Analysis.

New: Click to define a new selection set of faces. You can define individual selection sets with separate pull-directions.

Delete: Click to delete the selection set.

Definition: Enter the draft angle range to use for the analysis.

Selection: In the Selection area click the arrow button to select the part or faces.

Part: Enables you to select the entire part for analysis.

Faces: Enables you to select individual faces for analysis.

In the Selection area, click the arrow to define, and if necessary flip the pull direction for the current selection set.

Click OK or Apply to display the results.

In the example above, the a draft analysis as been performed on the selected faces. The green areas indicate safe draft angles while the red areas indicate 90 degree conditions. The color ranges from blue (negative angle specified) to red (0 degree draft angle) to Green (positive angle specified). Faces represented in Blue or Green, have acceptable draft angles, while Red indicates 0 degree draft angles which could cause problems when trying to pull the mold away from the part.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals370

Page 381: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Locating ComponentsProcedureYou can use the Find tool to locate files or components within the active assembly. You can create different searches by defining criteria based upon various file properties and save these custom searches for later use.

There are two slightly different versions of the Find dialog box. You access the Find: Autodesk Inventor Files dialog by clicking the Find button on the Open dialog box. The Find Assembly Components dialog box is accessed by clicking Find on the Edit menu, while working in the context of the assembly.

Both tools function the same way, the only difference is that the latter only searches the active assembly file, and highlights and selects the matching components in the browser.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access tools for locating files Autodesk Inventor files.

The main window in each of these dialog boxes lists the current search criteria. You create the search criteria by selecting the property from the Property drop-down list. You then select the appropriate condition and if necessary, provide a value. Click the

Open Dialog Box Find

Edit Menu (Assemblies Only) Locates components within the active assembly only.

Find

Keyboard Shortcut (Assemblies Only) Locates components within the active assembly only.

CTRL+F

371Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 382: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Add to list button to add the criteria to the main window list. Use the Save Search button to save the search for later use, and the Open Search button to load previously saved searches.

Build and optionally save the search criteria, then click Find Now to search for Autodesk Inventor files that meet the criteria defined.

Build and optionally save the search criteria, then click Find Now to search for components in the active assembly that meet the defined criteria. Components that meet the criteria will be highlighted in the browser. You use this tool for large assemblies, where it would be difficult to manually locate components in the browser.

Find Autodesk Inventor Files Dialog Box

Find Assembly Components

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals372

Page 383: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Assembly AnalysisPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will use the concepts and techniques learned in this lesson to perform an interference analysis on an assembly. You will use the Analyze Faces tool to analyze faces on a part file and complete the exercise by using the Find tool to find various files.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling

Fundamentals

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Assembly Analysis

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Completed Interference Analysis

373Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 384: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

PresentationsOverview

Overview

OverviewYou use Presentations files to create exploded views of the assembly. If you require exploded views in your drawing you will first need to create the exploded view in a Presentation file.

You can also use the Presentation environment to:

• Help explain and visualize components in the assembly that would otherwise be obstructed from view when the assembly is shown in its assembled condition.

• Visualize the interaction between parts in the assembly by animating the exploded view to show the assembly's transition between the assembled and exploded states.

The Presentation file is stored as a separate *.ipn file which references the assembly and part files for the geometry.

In this lesson you will learn to create exploded views and animations.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Create a Presentation View

• Create Tweaks and Trails in a Presentation View

• Animate a Presentation View

Assembly Exploded View

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals374

Page 385: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating a PresentationProcedureBefore you create a Presentation View, you must create a Presentation File. You store the Presentation in an *.ipn file. Default templates are available for Presentation files.

On the Standard toolbar, on the New fly-out menu, select Presentation.

Presentation EnvironmentThe Presentation Environment is similar to the part modeling and assembly environment. The Panel Bar contains the tools you use to create the Presentations; the graphics window displays the assembly geometry you use in the presentation views; and the browser displays view names and other information relevant to the Presentation environment.

Creating a Presentation ViewYou use a Presentation View to create exploded views of the assembly. There is no limit to the number of presentation views you can create, but you can only reference one assembly in each Presentation file.

Presentation Environment

375Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 386: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access to Create View tool.

When you select the Create View tool, the Select Assembly dialog box is displayed.

File: If you already have an assembly file open, it will be listed automatically in the File field. If you do not currently have an assembly file open, you will need to enter the path for the assembly or select the browse button to browse for the assembly file.

Design View: Select the Design View to use as the basis for the Presentation View. Click the browse button to browse for a different design view file.

Explosion Method: Select the explosion method from the following options.

Manual: This option creates the Presentation View without exploding the assembly components. You explode the view later by adding tweaks to move each component.

Automatic: This option creates the exploded view by automatically moving the components in the assembly based on the distance you enter in the Distance field. Only components with certain assembly constraints such as Mate, and Insert, will be moved automatically.

Distance: Enter an explosion distance to move each component. This option is only available if you select Automatic.

Create Trails: This option will create trails indicating the path of each component from its assembled position to the exploded position.

Panel Bar

Select Assembly Dialog Box

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals376

Page 387: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The image below represents a typical presentation containing two Presentation Views. Each Presentation View is displayed in the browser. You can expand it to display the assembly components. Other options are available for filtering the information presented in the browser.

To activate a view, double-click on the view in the browser. The view names listed here are the same view names available to create a 2D drawing view later. If necessary you can rename the view by performing a slow double-click on the name in the browser.

Creating a Presentation View - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating a Presentation View.

1. Create a new Presentation file.2. On the Panel Bar, click the Create View tool. In the Select Assembly dialog box,

enter or browse for the assembly file to use in the Presentation View. Accept the default Design View or select one from the drop-down list.To automatically explode the components, select the Automatic explosion method and enter a distance in the Distance field. To create trails on the components, click the Create Trails option, then click OK to create the Presentation View.

Presentation View

377Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 388: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. The Presentation View is created accordingly and appears in the Presentation

Browser. Expand the view to see the components and tweaks automatically applied. If you need to edit the tweak, enter a new value in the Edit Box at the bottom of the browser.

4. Continue to create presentation views as required.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals378

Page 389: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Tweaks and TrailsProcedureAfter you create the presentation view, you may need to add tweaks to the components to move them to new locations in the exploded view. Even if you have chosen the automatic explosion method, most exploded views will require manual tweaks.

When you tweak a component you can move and/or rotate the component in any direction. When the tweaks are created you also have the option of displaying the trails, which represent a path from the components current location after tweaks have been applied, to its assembled location. Trails help clarify how a component in an exploded view fits into the overall assembly.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Tweak Components tool.

Direction: Click the Direction button to define the direction of the tweak. Select a face or edge on any component to display the Triad icon. The direction does not have to be defined from a feature on the part you tweak. Once the direction triad appears, you can select elements of the triad to control the transformation. The blue axis indicates the current transformation axis.

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut T

Tweak Component Dialog Box

379Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 390: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

You can switch the active direction by:

• Choosing another axis in the Tweak Component dialog box.

• Selecting the axis on the Triad to make it current.

Components: Click the Components button to select the components to tweak. If you select a component by mistake, deselect it by holding down the CTL key and reselecting the component.

Trail Origin: Click the Trail Origin button to select a different trail origin.

Display Trails: Select this option to display trails showing the path of the tweak.

Transformations: In the Tweak Component dialog box, in the Transformations area you can set the transformation options for the tweak. You can select the option to move or rotate the component.

Note: When you drag the tweak distance, start dragging the distance with the cursor away from existing components. Inadvertently selecting a point over a component will add that component to the tweak.

This option enables you to move the component along the selected axis. Clicking the X, Y, or Z here is the same as selecting each axis on the triad in the graphics window.

This option enables you to rotate the component around the selected axis. Enter a distance or angle value for the tweak and click the green check mark button. You can use the value field for tranlational and rotational tweaks.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals380

Page 391: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Edit Existing Trail: Click the Edit Existing Trail button to edit an existing trail. You will select the trail then adjust the tweak value.

Triad Only: Select this option to rotate the triad only. This option is only available when the rotational transformation is selected. By rotating the triad, you can tweak the component in different angles. In the same area, click the green check button to finish tweaking the triad.

Clear: Click to clear the current tweak and continue adding tweaks.

Close: Click to close the dialog box.

Creating Tweaks and Trails - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating tweaks and trails.

1. Create a Presentation View.2. On the Panel Bar, click the Tweak Components tool and select face or edge to

define the tweak direction.

3. Select the components to be included in the tweak.

381Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 392: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

4. Confirm the Transformation settings then click and drag in a blank area of the screen. Click Clear to apply the tweak and continue.

5. Select a face or edge to define the direction.

6. Select the components to include in the tweak, and confirm the transformation direction. Click and drag in a blank area of the graphics window and then click Clear to apply the tweak and continue.

7. Repeat the steps above to continue tweaking components. When finished, click Close.

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals382

Page 393: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Animating a Presentation ViewProcedureAfter you create the Presentation View, it is possible to animate the explosion sequence and visualize the components in the assembly moving into or out of their assembled position. You can record the animation to a standard AVI format for use on other computers.

There are several options available to animate the presentation view, some of which are beyond the scope of this course. In this lesson you will learn the basics for animating a Presentation View.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Animate tool.

After you start the Animate tool, use the standard player controls to play, rewind, or pause. In the Animation dialog box, in the Motion area, click the Record button to record the animation to an standard AVI file.

Expand the dialog box to examine the tweak sequence. By default the animation will play in the reverse order that you applied the tweaks.

If you select items in the sequence list, you can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the animation sequence of the selected tweak. When you tweak multiple components at the same time, they appear as a group in the sequence list. Select items in the list and use the Group and Ungroup buttons to move items in and out of sequence groups. All items in a sequence group are animated at the same time. After you play the animation, click Reset to reset the sequence back to the beginning.

Panel Bar

Animation Dialog Box

383Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 394: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Browser Sequence ViewClick the Filter button at the top of the browser and select Sequence View on the fly-out menu. This will display the tweaks in the sequence order that will be played during the animation sequence. Using this view it is possible to drag and drop component tweaks from one sequence to another.

Browser Sequence View

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals384

Page 395: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: PresentationsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will create a new presentation file of an assembly. After creating the presentation, you will create an exploded view of the components and then animate that exploded view.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling

Fundamentals

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Presentations

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Assembly Exploded View

385Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 396: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling FundamentalsChallenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

Print Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will use the concepts and techniques learned in this chapter to create the assembly pictured in the image below.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling

Fundamentals

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Completed Assembly Challenge

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals386

Page 397: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter SummarySummary

SummaryYou learned the following in this chapter:

• What constitutes an assembly model and the overall process used to create them.

• The different approaches that can be used when creating assembly models and the environment and interface used as you create the assembly.

• Perform several different assembly related operations using the assembly browser.

• Activating components and controlling the appearance properties of the browser.

• Resequencing and restructuring an assembly.

• Creating Design Views to save custom views and display characteristics of the assembly.

• Placing components in the assembly using the Place Component tool.

• Potential outside sources of geometry not created with Autodesk Inventor.

• Replacing existing components in the assembly, while understanding the potential effect on assembly constraints when doing so.

• Creating new parts in the context of the assembly.

• Using assembly based work features to constrain components and using parts consisting of only 2D geometry to validate design intent.

• Projecting geometry from other parts in the assembly when creating new components.

• Degrees of Freedom and how they effect each part in the assembly.

• Simulating motion in an assembly by driving constraints and temporarily repositioning components in the assembly by using the Move Component and Rotate Component tools.

• Placing assembly constraints on components in your assembly.

• Alternative methods for placing constraints on components in the assembly.

• Methods for creating adaptive features and sketches and how to control the adaptive status of these features.

• Tips and considerations for using Adaptive parts in your assembly.

387Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 398: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals388

Page 399: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In this chapterAfter completing this chapter, you will be able to...

• Create and utilize the available drafting standard to control properties of your drawing.

• Create and use text styles and dimension styles.

• Perform several functions involving drawing resources.

• Create base and projected views.

• Create and edit section views.

• Project isometric views from the section to create an isometric section view.

• Create and edit detail views.

• Create and edit auxiliary views on your sheet.

• Create and edit broken views on your sheet.

• Copy and/or move drawing views between sheets in the drawing.

• Retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing.

Introduction to Drawings

Chapter IntroductionIn this chapter you learn about...

• Creating and utilizing the available drafting standards to control several properties of your drawing.

• Creating and using text styles and dimension styles.

• Using various drawing resources.

• Creating base and projected views of your part or assembly files.

• Editing projected views and the options that are available.

• Creating and editing section views on your drawing.

• Creating detail views to magnify portions of your drawing view.

• Creating and editing auxiliary views on your sheet.

• Creating and editing broken views.

• Creating and editing break out views as an alternative to standard section views.

• Managing views and sections after they have been created.

• Copying and/or moving views between sheets in the drawing.

• Retrieving model dimensions for use in the drawing.

• Placing reference dimensions on the sheet.

• Creating general types of annotation on your drawing.

Page 400: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3

Setting Drafting StandardsOverview

Overview

OverviewAutodesk Inventor software supports ANSI, BSI, DIN, GB, ISO, and JIS, drafting standards. You use them to control the appearance of drawing features such as Balloons, Weld Symbols, and Parts Lists. The default standard is determined by the option you select during installation and can be changed for each drawing.

In this lesson you will learn how to use drafting standards to control the appearance of drawing features.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Use Drafting Standards to control the appearance of drawing features

• Create and use text styles in your drawing

• Create and use dimension styles in your drawings

• Create drawing templates

Drafting Standards and Styles

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings90

Page 401: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Drafting StandardsPrincipleYou use the Drafting Standards dialog box to control several different drawing feature properties. When you create a new drawing, the default drafting standard is determined by the options chosen during installation. You can create a new standard or modify an existing standard for the current drawing. When you create or modify drafting standards, the changes apply only to the current drawing. If you want the changes to be available to all new drawings, you must save the current drawing as template in your template directory.

Default Drafting StandardsThe following list represents the available default drafting standards. You can use these standard as they are, modify them, or create a new standard based upon one of the default standards.

• ANSI

• BSI

• DIN

• GB

• ISO

• JIS

Access MethodsUse the following method to access the Drafting Standards dialog box.

Pull Down Menu Format > Drafting Standards

391Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 402: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Drafting Standards Dialog BoxSelect the active drafting standard or click the Click to Add area to create new drafting standard based upon one of the existing standards.

Click the [>>] button to expand the Drafting Standards dialog box. Several tabs, each containing different options for controlling properties stored within the drafting standard are available.

Drafting Standards Dialog Box

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings392

Page 403: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Drafting Standard PropertiesEach tab in the Drafting Standards dialog box contains properties for drawing features that are stored within the drafting standard.

• Common Tab: This tab controls common drawing properties such as default text style, view projection, and line properties.

• Sheet Tab: The options on this tab controls sheet specific properties such as labels and colors.

• Terminator Tab: This tab controls the type and size of leader and dimension terminators.

393Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 404: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Dimension Style Tab: Select the active dimension style for the current standard. The characters must be selected to be available for dimensions. Unselected characters will not be available for dimensions.

• Control Frame Tab: Use the options on this tab for Control Frame properties. Only the selected symbols will be available for GD&T features.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings394

Page 405: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Datum Target Tab: These options control Datum Target feature properties such as point size, linetypes, and units.

• Parts List Tab: This tab controls Parts Lists properties such as Text Style, Heading, and Columns to be included.

395Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 406: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Balloon Tab: These options control properties for Balloon features such as Text Style, Balloon Type, and Offset Spacing.

• Hatch Tab: These options set the default hatch pattern for section views. Only the selected Hatches will be available when you create new hatch areas or modify existing hatch patterns.

• Center Mark Tab: These options control the center mark properties.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings396

Page 407: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Welding Symbols Tab: These options control weld symbol properties. Only the selected symbols will be available in the drawing.

• Weld Bead Recovery Tab: This tab controls the weld bead properties for weld features.

• Surface Texture Tab: These options control surface texture symbol properties. Only the selected symbols will be available when you place surface texture features.

397Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 408: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating a new Drafting Standard - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating a new drafting standard.

1. On the Format menu, click Drafting Standards.2. In the Drafting Standards dialog box, select the Click to add new standard area.

3. In the New Standard dialog box, enter a name for your standard, and select the base standard from the drop-down list.

4. The new drafting standard will be listed among the default drafting standards and should appear selected in the Current column. Continue to modify other properties as required. Click OK to close the Drafting Standards dialog box.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings398

Page 409: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Text StylesConceptYou create and use text styles to control the appearance of text features for annotation objects in your drawings. Stored within the drawing, the default text style is set within the current drafting standard. If you modify or create new text styles, and you want them available in other drawings, you will need to save the current drawing containing the text style as a drawing template in your template directory.

The image below represents the same text object with different text styles applied.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access Text Style related functions.

Different Text Styles

Note

Default Text StylesWithin each drawing is a default text style for each drafting standard. These text styles are named DEFAULT-Standard Name and cannot be modified or deleted. If you select one of these text styles in the Text Styles dialog box, all options will be grayed out.

Pull Down Menu Text Styles

Standard Toolbar Select to change the active text style, or apply a different text style to the selected text.

399Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 410: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

You can adjust the following properties for all but the DEFAULT-Standard Name text styles.

Standard: In the drop-down list, select the drafting standard to display text styles.

Font: In the drop-down list, select the text font for the style.

Size: In the drop-down list, select the size for the font, or enter a new value.

Style Name: Enter a name for the text style.

Format/Justification/Color: Select the options to control the format (Bold, Italic, Underline), Justification (Left, Center, Right, Top, Middle, Bottom) and color.

%Stretch: Specifies the width of the text.

Rotation: Click to set the default rotation of the text. 0, 270, 180, or 90 degrees.

Line Spacing: In the drop-down list, select the line spacing for the text style.

Value: Enter a line spacing value. Only available for the Exactly, or Multiply options.

Text Styles Dialog Box

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings400

Page 411: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Applying a different text style - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for applying a different text style to an annotation object.

1. Select an annotation object, then on the Standard toolbar, in the Style drop-down list, select the Text Style.

2. The selected annotation object updates to reflect the changes in the text style.

401Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 412: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Dimension StylesConceptYou create and use dimension styles to control the appearance properties of dimension objects in the drawing. Each dimension contains a number of different properties that you can modify and save in a dimension style. The default dimension style is set in the current drafting standard and each drafting standard includes a number of predefined dimension styles.

The following image shows several dimensions applied to the geometry using different dimension styles.

Dimension styles are stored within the drawing. In order to make your custom dimension styles available for other drawings, you must save the drawing as a template or use the drawing orgranizer to copy dimension styles from an existing drawing to the current one.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access dimension style functions.

Pull Down Menu Format > Dimension Styles

Standard Toolbar Select to set the active dimension style or change the dimension style of a selected dimension.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings402

Page 413: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Dimension Styles dialog box contains several tabs, each with a unique set of properties that you can adjust. Select the dimension style to modify and adjust the properties as required.

Using Dimension StylesAs you create dimensions in your drawing, the Style drop-down list reflects the current dimension style. Because the Style drop-down list is used for controlling other style related options, the dimension style is only displayed when one of the dimension tools is active.

Dimension Styles Dialog Box

Note

Default Dimension StyleDimension styles named DEFAULT-Standard Name exist for each drafting standard and cannot be modified. They can be used as the basis for new dimension styles by selecting the dimension style and clicking New.

403Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 414: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

If you want to change the current dimension style, select a different style from the drop-down list. The selected style will become the current dimension style until it is changed.

As you place the dimension, it assumes the properties of the current dimension style.

Overriding Dimension StylesDimension styles can be overridden by right-clicking on the dimension and then selecting Options or Tolerance on the shortcut menu.

When a setting being changed is common to one found in the Drafting Standards or the Dimension Style dialog boxes, the rule of thumb is:

• Override settings supersede the Dimension Style settings.

• Dimension Style settings supersede the Drafting Standard settings.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings404

Page 415: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Copying Dimension StylesThe drawing organizer enables you to copy dimension styles from a source drawing to the current drawing. The drawing organizer works exactly like the organizer for materials, color styles and lighting but only contains options specific to the drawing environment.

To copy a dimension style, enter or browse for the path of the source drawing containing the dimension style. Select the dimension style(s) to copy and click the Copy button.

Note

Dimension OverridesIf you apply a dimension style to a dimension containing overrides, the overrides on that dimension will be lost.

405Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 416: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Drawing TemplatesProcedureAfter you modify and create custom drafting standards, text styles, dimension styles, and other settings specific to your environment, you should save the drawing as a template. By saving the drawing as a template, you can create new drawings based on the template which will contain the custom settings created earlier.

The following list represents settings or properties that are saved within a drawing template.

• Drafting Standards

• Dimension Styles

• Text Styles

• Sheet Formats

• Borders

• Title Blocks

• Sketched Symbols

Access MethodUse the following method to create a drawing template.

Before you save your drawing file as a template, determine the location for your template files. The File Tab of the Options dialog box contains a field setting for the template location.

Save your drawing in this location or a subfolder to make it available as a template when you create new drawings.

Pull Down Menu File > Save Copy As

Options Dialog Box - Partial

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings406

Page 417: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Setting Drafting StandardsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create a new drawing and define a new drafting standard, text style, and dimension style. You will then save the drawing as a template a create a new drawing using the new template.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Drafting Standards and Styles

407Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 418: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Drawing ResourcesOverview

Overview

OverviewA typical Autodesk Inventor drawing contains several features that are not directly related to the 3D geometry they are used to represent. Features such as sheets, title blocks, borders, and views are all used to present information that meet typical drawing standards.

In this lesson you learn how to utilize the various drawing resources available in a typical drawing environment.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Edit the default sheet by changing its size, orientation and other options

• Create drawings containing predefined views by using Sheet Formats

• Create drawings containing multiple sheets

• Create sheet formats to enable you to easily create drawings containing predefined views

• Define a sheet border for use in future drawings

• Create a custom title block for use in future drawings

• Edit existing title blocks that are automatically placed on the drawing

Drawing Created Using Drawing Resources

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings408

Page 419: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing the Default SheetProcedureWhen you create a new drawing, it is created with one default sheet. Each sheet contains properties for size, orientation, and title block position that you can edit.

Access MethodUse the following method to access the Edit Sheet tool.

The following options are available in the Edit Sheet dialog box.

Name: Enter a sheet name or accept the default.

Size: Select a predefined sheet size or select the custom size option in the drop-down list.

Height: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list, enter a height for the sheet.

Width: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list, enter a width for the sheet.

Orientation: Select a title block position option and the orientation of the sheet Portrait or Landscape.

Exclude from count: By default each sheet is counted and its number displayed in the title block. Selecting this option will exclude the current sheet from the count and thereby not counted in the title block area showing the sheet number.

Exclude from printing: Selecting this option will exclude the current sheet from printing when you select the All Sheets option in the Print Drawing dialog box.

Shortcut Menu Right-click on the sheet in the browser > Edit Sheet

Edit Sheet Dialog Box

409Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 420: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing the Default Sheet - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for editing the default sheet.

1. In the drawing browser, right-click on the sheet and click Edit Sheet on the shortcut menu.

2. Adjust the options as required in the Edit Sheet dialog box and click OK.

3. The sheet in the graphics window and browser updates to reflect the new information.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings410

Page 421: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using a Sheet Format for Sheet LayoutProcedureIncluded in each new drawing, located under the drawing resources folder in the drawing browser, is a Sheet Formats folder. You can expand this folder to expose pre-defined sheet formats to automatically create pre-defined drawing views.

A sheet format is defined for common sheet sizes. Double-click on a sheet format to create a new sheet using the pre-defined sheet size and views. Each sheet format will consist of one view based upon a predefined orientation such as Front and other projected views. The view scale is set to 1 and may require editing after placement.

Access MethodsUse the following method to access pre-defined sheet formats.

Selecting the ComponentWhen you double-click on the sheet format, the Select Component dialog box will appear. In the drop-down list you can select from the list of currently open Autodesk Inventor files, or use the Browse button to browse for the file.

A new sheet is created with the predefined views of the selected file.

Drawing Browser

411Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 422: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Multiple SheetsProcedureAlthough each new drawing is created with a single sheet, you are not limited to the amount of sheets that can be included in a single drawing.

When you create a new sheet in the drawing, depending on the method chosen to create the new sheet, you will either be presented with the New Sheet dialog box or the sheet size and properties will be duplicated from the current sheet. The latter result only occurs when creating a new sheet by right-clicking in the browser and selecting New Sheet on the shortcut menu.

The image below represents multiple sheets in the browser. You can only view one sheet at a time. To activate a sheet, double-click on the sheet in the browser.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to add new sheets to the drawing.

Pull Down Menu Insert > Sheet

Drawing Browser Right-click in a blank area and click New Sheet

Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT + N

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings412

Page 423: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The following options are available in the New Sheet dialog box.

Size: Select a predefined sheet size from the drop-down list, or click Custom to enter a custom sheet size.

Height: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list, enter a height for the sheet.

Width: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list, enter a width for the sheet.

Orientation: Select the appropriate orientation option, either Portrait or Landscape.

New Sheet Dialog Box

413Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 424: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Sheet FormatsProcedureEach drawing contains predefined sheet formats that you can use to automatically create drawing views on a new sheet. You can also define custom sheet formats that represent sheet sizes and view positions that are common to your drawings. If the drawings you create utilize the same view configuration and sheet size, consider creating custom sheet formats.

Custom sheet formats are stored in the current drawing. Save the current drawing as a template to have access to the sheet formats later. Unlike Dimension Styles and Text Styles, sheet formats cannot be copied from another drawing using the Drawing Organizer.

After you create the new sheet format, it will appear in the Sheet Formats folder in the drawing browser.

Access MethodsUse the following method to access the Create Sheet Format tool.

Drawing Browser

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings414

Page 425: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Name: Enter a sheet format name and click OK.

Creating Sheet Formats - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating sheet formats.

1. Create a drawing containing the sheet size and views common to other drawings that you create.

2. In the browser, right-click on the sheet and select Create Sheet Format dialog box.

Create Sheet Format Dialog Box

415Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 426: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Enter a descriptive name in the Create Sheet Format dialog box and click OK.

4. Your custom sheet format will appear in the Sheet Formats folder in the browser. Double-click on the sheet format to use it to create new sheets.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings416

Page 427: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Defining a BorderProcedure • Each drawing you create will contain a Default Border item listed in the

Borders folder in the drawing browser. The default border is used on all new sheets and can resize dynamically when the sheet size is changed.

• You can define a custom border for use on your drawings. If you decide to create a custom border, consider these two items.

• Custom borders do not resize automatically if the sheet size changes. • When creating a new border, you should create a new sheet based upon

the size the new border will be designed to fit.• To define a new border, expand the Drawing Resources and right-click on the

Borders folder and click Define New Border on the shortcut menu.

• Use standard sketching tools to sketch the border geometry. After you create the border geometry, right-click in the graphics window and click Save Border on the shortcut menu.

• Enter a name in the Border dialog box and click OK.

417Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 428: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• To use the new border, double-click on it in the browser.

Inserting a BorderWhen you create a new drawing, or add a new sheet to the existing drawing, it will automatically contain a border. To insert a different border, you must first delete the existing border from the sheet. After the border is deleted from the sheet, you can double-click on a border in the Borders folder or right-click on a border and click Insert Drawing Border.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings418

Page 429: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Defining a Title BlockProcedureYou can define custom title blocks for use in your drawings. Title blocks are stored within the current drawing, therefore you should save the file containing the drawing as a template in order to have access to the custom title block later.

To define a new title block, right-click on the Title Blocks folder and select Define New Border on the shortcut menu.

Use standard sketch tools to create the geometry and text features for the title block. You can include special text items such as Property fields or Prompted Entry fields in the title block. Property fields are automatically populated based up file properties such as Part Number, or Author, while Prompted Entry fields are populated by prompting you for the values to use in the dialog box.

In the image below, the default title block definition displays standard sketch geometry and dimensions as well as different types of text, some static text while others are property fields. Text between < > indicates a non-static text entity.

After creating the geometry and text for the title block, right click in the graphics window and click Save Title Block on the shortcut menu. Enter a name for the new Title Block in the Title Block dialog box.

The new title block will be displayed in the browser under the Title Blocks folder. Double-click on the title block to use it on the sheet.

419Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 430: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Inserting a Title BlockWhen you create a new drawing, or add a new sheet to the existing drawing, it will automatically contain a title block. To insert a different title block, you must first delete the existing title block from the sheet. After the title block is deleted from the sheet, you can double-click on a title block in the Title Blocks folder or right-click on a Title Block and click Insert.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings420

Page 431: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing Title BlocksProcedureEach drawing template will contain at least one default title block that will be placed on each new sheet in the drawing. In most cases the default title block will only require minimal modifications to include information required by your company.

Like other drawing resource items, title blocks are stored in the current drawing so save the drawing as a template in order to have access to the revised title block at a later date.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to edit a title block.

Browser

Browser

421Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 432: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

When you add text elements to the title block, in order to include property fields or prompted entry items, use the Property Field tool on the Panel Bar. Selecting this tool will display a different version of the Format Text dialog box as shown below.

Select the appropriate property type based upon the text element you are creating.

For more information on these property types refer to the Autodesk Inventor software help system.

Editing Title Blocks - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for editing title blocks.

1. In the browser, right-click on the title block and select Edit Definition on the shortcut menu.

2. A new sheet containing the title block definition is displayed.

Format Field Text Dialog Box

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings422

Page 433: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Add sketch geometry, text, and property fields as required.

4. Right-click in the graphics window and click Save Title Block on the shortcut menu. Click Yes in the Save Edits dialog box.

5. Changes to the title block definition are applied to the sheet and the title block definition in stored in drawing resources.

423Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 434: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Drawing ResourcesPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will use the features available in the drawing resources folder to perform common tasks in the drawing environment.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Drawing Resources

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Drawing Created Using Drawing Resources

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings424

Page 435: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Projected ViewsOverview

Overview

OverviewAfter you complete the 3D design of your part or assembly, manufacturing will require dimensioned drawings in order to build your design. The first step in creating production drawings is to create the required orthographic and isometric views.

In this lesson you learn how to create projected views of your part or assembly files.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Create a base view

• Create projected views from the base view

• Edit orthographic views and understand how other projected views may be affected

Assembly Drawing with Projected Views

425Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 436: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating a Base ViewProcedureYou create a base view to begin creating orthographic views. The base view establishes the original view orientation and scale where the latter projected views will be based.

When you create the base view, you specify the file to be used for the view, the view orientation, scale, and style. After you specify this information, the view is placed onto the sheet and an associative link between the drawing and the part, assembly, or presentation file is established. If the part geometry changes, those changes will reflect in the drawing.

The image below is a base view of a part placed in the drawing.

Access MethodUse the following method to access the Base View tool.

Panel Bar

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings426

Page 437: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

File: Enter or browse for the file to create its view. If you have a part, assembly, or presentation file open, it will be the default file listed. If multiple files are open, you select them in the drop-down list.

Orientation: Select the orientation for the base view. Move your cursor away from the dialog box to see a preview of the view before it is created. The standard view orientations are based upon the origin planes of the file you select.

Change View Orientation: Select this icon to open the model's 3D viewing window. You use standard view tools to define a custom view orientation.

Weldment: Available only when creating a view of an Autodesk Inventor weldment assembly.

Design View: Available only when you create a view of an Autodesk Inventor assembly. You select the Design View to use for the initial view creation.

• Associative: When you create a view of an Assembly, this option makes the view associative to the design view. This option is not available for default.user design views.

Scale: Enter a scale or select a predefined scale on the flyout menu.

Scale from Base: Not available when you create a base view. You use it when you edit projected views.

Show Scale: This option displays the scale on the sheet under the view.

Label: Enter a label for the view or accept the default view label. The view label is displayed in the drawing browser.

Show Label: This option displays the view label on the sheet under the view.

Style: Select the rendering style for the view:

• Hidden Line - Hidden lines are displayed.

Drawing View Dialog Box

427Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 438: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Hidden Line Removed - Hidden lines are removed.

• Shaded - View is shaded using the same colors used in the assembly or part file

Creating a Base View - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating a base view in the drawing.

1. Create a new drawing.2. On the Panel Bar, click the Base View tool.3. Enter or browse for the Autodesk Inventor file to create the view and adjust the

options such as orientation, scale, and style. Left click on the sheet to place the view.

4. The base view is placed on the sheet according to the options specified.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings428

Page 439: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Projected ViewsProcedureThe Projected View tool enables you to create projected views from any existing view on the sheet. It presents no options or dialog box.

If you select the Projected View tool you must select the base view, then position each projected view. I you right-click on a view and select Create View > Projected, you drag the projected views to the desired position, then after the view positions have been placed, right-click, and select create on the shortcut menu. All view positions are previewed by a bounding box prior to the views being created.

When you create projected views, the view orientation is automatically determined based upon its position on the sheet relative to the base view. If you place the projected view to the right of the base view, it will generate a right-side projection of the base view. If you place the projected view at an angle from the base view, it will generate an isometric view based upon the relative position from the base view.

By default the following view properties are carried over from the base view:

• Scale

• Style (Orthographic Only)

The following image represents a typical drawing with a base view and three projected views.

Note

Drafting Standards Projection SettingThe description above is based upon a Third Angle projection setting in the Drafting Standards dialog box. First Angle projection method is also available.

429Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 440: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Projected Views - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating projected views.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Projected View tool and select the base view.

2. Move the cursor to the location of the projected view and left-click. A bounding box of the view will appear at the placement location.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu Create View > Projected

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings430

Page 441: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Continue to select positions on the sheet for projected views.

4. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create on the shortcut menu.

5. The projected views are created based upon the positions selected on the sheet.

431Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 442: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing Projected ViewsProcedureAfter you create base and projected views, you can edit the view properties using the Drawing View dialog box. Depending on the type of view, Base or Projected, different options are available for editing.

When you edit a Base view, you can change the Scale and Style properties, however while editing a projected view, you can only change these properties if you clear the options Scale from Base and/or Style from Base. On a projected view, these properties are linked to the base view to ensure the same scale across views, and the same rendering style.

Access MethodsUse the following method to edit views.

Editing a Base ViewWhile you edit a base view, you can edit any option that is not greyed out. If you change the scale factor on the base view, all projected views with the Scale from Base option selected, will update to reflect the new scale factor.

Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and click Edit View.

Drawing View Dialog - Editing a Base View

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings432

Page 443: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing a Projected ViewWhile you edit a projected view, you can edit any option that is not greyed out. Clear the check mark for the Scale from Base and Style from Base options to change the view scale or rendering style.

Drawing Dialog Box - Editing a Projected View

433Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 444: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Projected ViewsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will create a new drawing and place a base view and three projected views on the sheet.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Projected Views

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Assembly Drawing with Projected Views

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings434

Page 445: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Section ViewsOverview

Overview

OverviewWhen you create drawings of parts and assemblies, important internal details are sometimes obscured by other features or parts. Section views enable you to better visualize these important details by removing the parts or features that are obstructing the view. Features that were obstructed or displayed as hidden lines, are drawn with continuous lines with hatch patterns representing the section plane.

In this lesson you learn how to create section views of part and assembly drawings.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Create section views in the drawing

• Create section views of the assembly in the drawing while controlling which parts are sectioned

• Edit section views by modifying the section line and editing the hatch pattern

Completed Section Views

435Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 446: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Section ViewsProcedureYou create section views with the Section View tool. In order to create a section view, you must have at least one view on the drawing on which the section line is drawn. After drawing the section line, you pick a side of the current view for the section view. The section view is generated based upon the direction of sight in relation to the view being sectioned.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Section View tool.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu Create View > Section

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings436

Page 447: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The following options are available in the Section View dialog box.

Label: Enter a label for the section view.

Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet.

Scale: Enter a scale factor for the section view.

Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet.

Style: Select a rendering style for the view.

• Hidden Line

• Hidden Line Removed

• Shaded

Section Lines and ConstraintsWhen you draw the section line, 2D constraints are being inferred the same as when sketching in the 3D modeling environment. You can constrain the sketch line to elements within the drawing view such as centers, endpoints, and midpoints. Constraining the section line to elements in the drawing view assist you in accurate positioning of the section line, but can also make moving the section line later, more difficult. When creating the section line, you can hold the CTRL key down to prevent constraints from being inferred. This technique is the same used to prevent constraints from being inferred in the modeling environment.

Section View Dialog Box

437Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 448: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Follow the image sequence below to see the effect of constraints being inferred.

Tip

Isometric Section ViewYou can use Projected View tool to project an isometric view from a section view the same way you would project a standard view.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings438

Page 449: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Section Views - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating section views.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Section View tool and select the view to be sectioned. A red border will highlight the view.

2. Sketch the section line. Note: You can draw the section line in one or more directions.

3. After drawing the section line, right-click in the graphics window and click Continue on the shortcut menu.

439Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 450: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

4. Drag the section view to one side of the view being sectioned. If necessary, adjust the section view options in the Section View dialog box and select a point on the screen to section the view.

5. The section view is created.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings440

Page 451: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Assembly Section ViewsProcedureWhen you create section views of assembly drawings, each part in the assembly section view will be hatched with different properties for visual clarity as the section plane passes through each part. You can also control which parts are sectioned. By default, parts from the standard parts library are not sectioned, however you can manually turn on sectioning for standard parts.

You create section views for assembly drawings using the same techniques as single part section views.

Controlling Component SectioningWhen you create a section view of an assembly drawing view, you can control which components are sectioned by right-clicking on the view being sectioned and clicking Show Contents on the shortcut menu. This can be done in the graphics window or in the browser.

441Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 452: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

This results in the assembly and parts being listed under the view in the browser. Parts appearing with a gray icon indicate that the parts visibility is currently turned off.

After the contents of the assembly are displayed in the drawing browser, right-clicking on the components will present options on the shortcut menu. To prevent a part from being sectioned, clear the check mark next to the Section option.

Tip

In order to prevent a component from being sectioned in the section view, you must turn off the section property on the view being sectioned, not the section view.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings442

Page 453: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing Section ViewsProcedureAfter you create the section view, it can be edited a number of ways.

• Right-click on the view and click Edit View on the shortcut menu. This will present the Drawing View dialog box enabling you to edit the view in the same way to would edit other projected views.

• Edit the sketch used for the section line. This will present the Sketch Panel Bar, enabling you to edit the sketch geometry in the same way you would edit sketch geometry in the modeling environment. You can apply/remove constraints, modify the sketch geometry, apply dimensions to the sketch geometry.

• Constraint Drag the section line. You can edit the section line by dragging elements of the section line to new positions. This can only be done on elements of the section line that are not constrained to drawing geometry.

443Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 454: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

• Editing the hatch pattern. Right click on a hatch pattern in the section view. This will present the Modify Hatch Pattern dialog box, enabling you to change the hatch pattern properties.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings444

Page 455: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Section ViewsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will create section views of the assembly. After creating the section view, you will turn off sectioning for some components and edit the section by moving the section line and changing the hatch pattern applied to some components.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Section Views

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Completed Section Views

445Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 456: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Detail ViewsOverview

Overview

OverviewAs you create 2D drawings for manufacturing, it may be necessary to magnify drawing areas to show small details, and apply dimensions that would otherwise be difficult to clearly show. When you create a detail view, you magnify an area of the drawing while creating an associative link between the original view and the detail view. If the geometry being magnified, changes in the original view, those changes also reflect in the detail view.

In this lesson you learn to create detail views.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Create detail views to magnify areas of your drawing

• Edit detail views

Drawing with Detail Views

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings446

Page 457: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Detail ViewsProcedureYou use the Detail View tool to create detail views of an existing view in the drawing. When you start the tool, you are prompted to select a view then select a start point of the fence. The start point of the fence is the center of the detail view. After you select the start point, you drag the cursor away from the start point which will preview the detail view circle. All geometry contained within the detail view circle will be included in the detail view. After you select the end point of the fence, you are prompted to select a location for the view. The detail view will be positioned on the sheet at the selected point and will be scaled and labeled according to the options specified in the Detail View dialog box.

The resulting view is associated with the main view and any changes effecting geometry within the detail view will be automatically reflected in the detail view. Although the view is scaled, just like other scaled views, when you place dimensions on geometry within the view, the dimensions will reflect the actual geometry size.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Detail View tool.

The following options are available in the Detail View dialog box.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu Create View > Detail

Detail View Dialog Box

447Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 458: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Label: Enter a label for the detail view.

Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet.

Scale: Enter a scale factor for the detail view.

Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet.

Style: Select a rendering style for the view.

• Hidden Line

• Hidden Line Removed

• Shaded

Creating Detail Views - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating detail views.

1. With at least one view on the drawing, on the Panel Bar, click the Detail View tool.2. Select the view then select the center point of the detail view. In the Detail View

dialog box, adjust the options as required, but do not click OK. Clicking OK will end the tool without creating the view.

3. Drag the detail view fence outwards and select a point that will include all required

geometry within the fence circle and left click to designate the end point of the

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings448

Page 459: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

fence circle.

4. Position the detail view as required and left-click to place the view.

5. The detail view is created accordingly.

449Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 460: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing Detail ViewsProcedureYou can edit detail views in the same way you would edit other types of views, right-click on the detail view and click Edit View on the shortcut menu. The Drawing View dialog box is displayed, enabling you to change the scale, label, and style options.

You can also edit the detail view by editing the fence circle used to define the area of the detail view. If you select the detail view fence and label on the main view, grip points will appear as shown in the image below.

Selecting the center grip point will enable you to move the fence circle, while selecting a grip point on the circle will enable you to change the size of the fence circle and thereby effect the area included in the detail view. In the image below, the detail view has been moved to a different area as well as resized.

It is also possible to edit the location of the view label located on the detail view circle. Click and drag on the label to place it in a new location along the detail fence circle. Movement of the label is restricted to be along the diameter of the circle.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings450

Page 461: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Detail ViewsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create and edit detail views.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Detail Views

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Drawing with Detail Views

451Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 462: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Auxiliary ViewsOverview

Overview

OverviewWhen you create drawings of parts some features on the geometry are positioned in a way that they cannot be accurately represented based upon the standard planes of projection.

Auxiliary views enable you to create additional views on the drawing that are projected at a perpendicular angle from the selected edge. This results in a view that is normal to the selected edge and therefore the features along that edge are represented correctly.

In this lesson you learn to create auxiliary views.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create auxiliary views

• Edit and/or realign auxiliary views

Drawing Containing Rotated Auxiliary Views

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings452

Page 463: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Auxiliary ViewsProcedureOccasionally a situation may arise in the drawing in which some features cannot be accurately represented by the standard projection planes. This situation generally occurs when features on the part lie alone planes other than the standard XYZ planes on the part. When this occurs, creating 2D views of these features results in the features not being displayed at an angle normal to the face or feature. As a result of the feature orientation, you may not be able to clearly dimension and/or represent the features.

To resolve this situation, you can use the Auxiliary View tool to create drawing views that are projected and an angle that is perpendicular or parallel to the selected edge.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Auxiliary View tool.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu Create View > Auxiliary

453Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 464: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The following options are available in the Auxiliary View dialog.

Label: Enter a label for the auxiliary view.

Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet.

Scale: Enter a scale factor for the auxiliary view.

Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet.

Style: Select a rendering style for the view.

• Hidden Line

• Hidden Line Removed

• Shaded

Creating Auxiliary Views - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating auxiliary views.

1. With at least one view on the sheet, on the Panel Bar, click the Auxiliary View tool and select the view.

2. The Auxiliary View dialog box appears. Adjust the options as required and select an edge in the view to base the auxiliary view on.

Auxiliary View Dialog Box

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings454

Page 465: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Note: By default, the scale value will be the same as the selected view.

3. Drag the auxiliary view to the desired location and left-click to position the view.

4. The auxiliary view is created accordingly.

455Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 466: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing Auxiliary ViewsProcedureAfter you create the auxiliary view it can be edited in different ways.

1. You can right-click on the view and select Edit View to use the Drawing View dialog box to make changes to the view just as you would other projected views.

2. You can break the alignment of the view to position it differently on the sheet.3. You can right-click on the view and select Realign Auxiliary Views to reselect the

edge used to define the auxiliary view direction.In this lesson you learn how to break the view alignment and realign the auxiliary view.

Breaking the Auxiliary View AlignmentOne drawback to creating auxiliary views is that by restricting the view placement to be perpendicular or parallel to the selected edge, finding a suitable placement on the sheet at these angles can sometimes be difficult. By breaking the alignment of the view, you are free to move the auxiliary view anywhere on the sheet.

The following steps represent an overview for breaking the view alignment of an auxiliary view.

1. Right-click on the auxiliary view and click Alignment > Break on the shortcut menu.

2. You can now drag the auxiliary view to any location on the sheet. Note the appearance of the view direction lines with labels matching the view label.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings456

Page 467: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Realigning the Auxiliary ViewIt is possible to realign the auxiliary view by reselecting the edge originally used in defining the view direction. One benefit to using this method to realign the view is that dimensions and annotations associated with the view will move with the view as it is realigned. In most cases these dimensions and/or annotations will need to be repositioned.

The following steps represent an overview for realigning an auxiliary view.

1. Right-click on the auxiliary view and click Realign auxiliary views on the shortcut menu.

2. Select a different edge for the auxiliary view alignment.

457Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 468: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Drag the auxiliary view to its new position and left-click to place the view.

4. Reposition and/or delete the dimension and annotations as required.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings458

Page 469: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Auxiliary ViewsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will create and edit auxiliary views on the drawing.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Auxiliary Views

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Drawing Containing Rotated Auxiliary Views

459Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 470: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Broken ViewsOverview

Overview

OverviewYou use Broken views to shorten the view of elongated objects. You can use broken views when areas of the view can be removed without sacrificing the display of part features.

In this lesson you learn to create broken views.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Use the Broken View tool to shorten elongated views

• Edit a broken view by moving the grip points defining the break

Drawing Containing Broken Views

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings460

Page 471: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Broken ViewsProcedureYou create broken views by creating a base or projected view. After you create the view to be broken, you use the Broken View tool to break the view. When you create a broken view, all parent or child views associated with the view being broken will also appear as broken views. If dimensions have been placed on the drawing, the dimension lines will appear with a break symbol indicating the dimension is attached to a broken view. The dimension value will always represent the actual length being dimensioned.

The image below represents a shift linkage rod displayed in a broken view format. Note the appearance of the break lines and the break symbol on the dimension.

You can adjust the following options in the Broken View dialog box.

Style: Select the break line style, Rectangular or Structural.

Display: Use the Min./Max. slider to adjust the display scale of the break lines.

Gap: Enter a value for the gap between break lines on the sheet.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu Create View > Broken

Broken View Dialog Box

461Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 472: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Symbols: Available only when the Structural style is selected, sets the number of structural break symbols along the break lines.

Orientation: Click the desired orientation, vertical or horizontal.

Creating Broken Views - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating broken views.

1. With at least one view on the sheet, on the Panel Bar, click the Broken View tool. Adjust the options in the Broken View dialog box as required. Do NOT click OK.

2. With the Broken View dialog box still open, select the first and second break points. The area between these two points will be removed from the view.

3. The view is broken and the area removed.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings462

Page 473: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing Broken ViewsProcedureAfter you create the broken view you can edit it like other views. You use the Edit View tool to change properties such as Scale, Labels, and Style. You can also edit the broken view using methods specific to broken views.

When you create a broken view, the break lines can be selected and will appear with a grip point at the center of the view as shown here.

Click and drag on the grip point to move the break to a new location.

You can also resize the break by clicking and dragging on the break lines. This has the effect of increasing or decreasing the area being removed by the break.

To decrease the effective area of the view, drag one break line over to the other side of the opposite break line.

463Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 474: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Broken ViewsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create and edit broken views of the shifter linkage part.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Broken Views

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Drawing Containing Broken Views

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings464

Page 475: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Break Out ViewsOverview

Overview

OverviewSometimes section views remove too much information, or prevent important features on the outside of the part from being ideally represented. Break Out views can help to alleviate this problem by limiting the section view to an area encompassed by a sketch boundary and sectioned to a specified depth.

When you create a break out view, you are cutting a window into the part or assembly to view features and/or parts that are obstructed by geometry.

In this lesson you learn to create and edit break out views.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Create break out views to show internal part features

• Use different methods to edit a break out view

Drawing Containing Break Out Views

465Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 476: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Break Out ViewsProcedureBefore you create a break out view you must sketch a closed profile representing the area to be cut from the view. You can create sketches in the drawing the same way you create sketches in the modeling environment. But in the drawing environment you can place your sketch on the sheet, or attach it to a drawing view.

To create break out views, the sketch must be attached to the drawing view. To do this you select the drawing view prior to selecting the Sketch tool on the Standard toolbar. There are two methods for selecting the view prior to creating the sketch,

• Select the view on the sheet.

• Select the view in the drawing browser.

When you select the view it will appear with a green bounding box.

As an indication that the sketch is attached to the view, it will appear nested under the view in the browser.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings466

Page 477: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

After you create the sketch you create a closed profile representing the area to be broken out from the view. Use standard sketching tools such as Lines, Splines, and Circles to create the closed profile. After you create the close profile, on the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit the sketch.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Break Out View tool.

The following options are available on the Break Out View dialog box.

Boundary: Select the sketch to use as the boundary for the break out view. If only one closed profile exists, it will be automatically selected.

Depth: Select the following options in the drop-down list.

From Point: Select a point to set the depth of the break out view. You can select a point in the current view or an adjacent projected or parent view. Optionally, enter an offset value from the selected point.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu Create View > Break Out

Break Out View Dialog Box

467Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 478: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

To Sketch: Select a sketch line in an adjacent view to set the break out view depth.

To Hole: Select a hole in the current or adjacent view to set the break out view depth.

Through Part: When you create a break out view on an assembly, this option will break though the part in the area enclosed by the boundary.

Show Hidden Edges: Temporarily displays hidden lines on a view in which they are not shown. This enables you to select geometry that is hidden to set the view depth.

Tip

Isometric Break Out ViewYou can project an isometric view of a break out view in the same way you project other isometric views.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings468

Page 479: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing Break Out ViewsProcedureAfter you create the break out view, aside from the standard Edit View option on the shortcut menu, you can edit the break out view using two additional methods that are unique to break out views.

Edit Definition: Right-click on the Break Out View in the browser and click Edit Definition on the shortcut menu. This will display the Break Out View dialog box enabling you to redefine how the view is created.

Edit Sketch: In the browser, right-click on the sketch used for the boundary to edit the sketch geometry.

469Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 480: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Break Out ViewsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you create a break out view of the part and then project an isometric view of the break out view. After creating the views, you will edit the break out view.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Break Out Views

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Drawing Containing Break Out Views

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings470

Page 481: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Managing Views and SectionsOverview

Overview

OverviewAs you create drawing it is often difficult to know exactly how many sheets will be required and exactly what the best position of the views will be. As you begin to apply dimensions and other annotations to the drawing, often times the views need to be moved, in some cases copied as well as deleted. It is important you become proficient with managing your drawing views.

In this lesson you learn to manage drawing views and sections.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Use the different methods available to align drawing views

• Delete a drawing view from the sheet

• Copy a view from one sheet to another

• Move views in the drawing from one sheet to another

Drawing Containing Typical Views

471Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 482: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Aligning ViewsProcedureAs you create drawing views they automatically align to the parent view from which they were projected, but there may be times when you need to change the alignment of drawing views to make better use of the available area on the sheet.

There are four options related to aligning drawing views.

• Horizontal - Aligns views horizontally.

• Vertical - Aligns views vertically.

• In Position - Aligns views In Position.

• Break - Breaks the alignment between views, enabling you to move the view in any direction.

Aligning Views Horizontally1. The Horizontal alignment option will align the selected view horizontally with

another view on the sheet. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. To realign the two views horizontally, right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > Horizontal on the shortcut menu.

2. Click the parent view for the alignment.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings472

Page 483: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. The horizontal view alignment is established.

Aligning Views Vertically1. The Vertical alignment option will align the selected view vertically with another

view on the sheet. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. To realign the two views vertically, right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > Vertical on the shortcut menu.

2. Click the parent view for the alignment.

473Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 484: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. The vertical view alignment is established.

In Position Alignment1. The In Position alignment option will align the selected view based upon an axis

that is neither vertical or horizontal. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. To realign the two views in position, right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > In Position on the shortcut menu.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings474

Page 485: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

2. Click the parent view for the alignment.

3. The In Position view alignment is established.

475Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 486: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Deleting a ViewProcedureYou can delete views from the sheet by right-clicking on View on the sheet or in the browser, and clicking Delete on the shortcut menu.

If you select a parent view for deletion, you will be prompted to confirm the deletion of any existing dependent views. Expand the Delete View dialog box and click the Yes/No field in the Delete column.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings476

Page 487: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Copy Views between SheetsProcedureYou can copy a view from one sheet to another by right-clicking on the view and clicking Copy on the shortcut menu.

Double-click on the destination sheet and right-click on the sheet and click Paste on the shortcut menu.

The view is copied onto the other sheet and appears in the browser with a new view name.

477Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 488: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Moving Views between SheetsProcedureYou can move a view from one sheet to another by dragging the view in the drawing browser.

1. In the browser, click and drag on the view being moved to the destination sheet. Look for the position indicator showing the position of the view in the browser.

2. The destination sheet is automatically activated. The selected view and all associated annotation is moved to the destination sheet. Note the change in appearance of the moved view in the browser.

Parent or dependent views of the moved view appear with shortcut icons with each view name indicating the sheet on which they are placed. You can right-click on the views with shortcut icons and click Go To on the shortcut menu, to activate the sheet of the selected view.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings478

Page 489: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Managing Views and SectionsPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will manage the drawing views by aligning, deleting, copying and moving views.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Managing Views and Sections

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Drawing Containing Typical Views

479Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 490: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Dimensioning a Drawing ViewOverview

Overview

OverviewA requirement common to all drawings are dimensions. After you place the drawing views, one of the first things you will do is begin to place the dimensions required to manufacture the part. There are several different ways to place dimensions on the drawing.

In this lesson you learn how to utilize model dimensions in the drawing and how to place general dimensions.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing and understand the effect of editing these dimensions in the drawing

• Place dimensions on the drawing using different dimensioning tools

Drawing Containing Dimensions

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings480

Page 491: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Retrieving Model DimensionsProcedureWhen you create your 3D model, you place parametric dimensions on sketches and features. When possible, you should utilize these dimensions on the drawing.

The Retrieve Dimensions tool enables you to retrieve dimensions from the model for use in the drawing. When you start the tool, you can select the dimensions that you want to retrieve while leaving others off. You can do this on both part and assembly drawing views.

When you retrieve model dimensions, you select a view for the dimensions. You can only retrieve those dimensions that were created on the same plane as the selected view.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Retrieve Dimensions tool.

The following options are available on the Retrieve Dimensions dialog box.

Select View: Select the view to retrieve the model dimension into. Only required when you start the Retrieve Dimensions tool from the Panel Bar.

Select Source:

Select Features: Select this option to retrieve dimensions from selected features.

Select Parts: Select this option to retrieve dimensions from the entire part.

Select Dimensions: Select the dimensions in the drawing view to retrieve. Only those dimensions that are selected will be retrieved.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and select > Retrieve Dimensions

Retrieve Dimensions Dialog Box

481Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 492: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Retrieving Model Dimension - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for retrieving model dimensions into the view.

1. On the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar, click the Retrieve Dimension tool and select the view to retrieve dimensions into.

2. Select the Part or Features to retrieve dimensions from.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings482

Page 493: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Click the Select Dimensions button and select the dimensions in the graphics window to retrieve. Only those dimensions that are selected here will be retrieved and placed in the view.

4. Click OK to retrieve the dimensions and close the dialog box.

Editing Model DimensionsAfter retrieving the model dimensions you may be required to edit the dimension's position. Click and drag on the dimension value to adjust the dimensions position.

The image below shows the dimensions in the positions in which they were retrieved.

483Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 494: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Represented below is the same area of the drawing after dragging the dimensions to new locations.

Changing Model Dimension ValuesIf enabled during installation, you have the option of editing model dimensions while in the drawing environment. Right-click on a model dimension in the drawing and select Edit Model Dimension on the shortcut menu. This will present the same Edit Dimension dialog box as presented in the modeling environment.

Editing a hole dimension will present the following dialog box.

Options available in the Hole Dimensions dialog box are based upon the options used when creating the hole feature.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings484

Page 495: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

After changing the dimension value, the geometry will update and the new value is reflected in the retrieved dimension.

Note

Proceed with Caution!When you edit model dimensions in the drawing, it is important to clarify that you are indeed changing the parametric dimension of the model. Changing the dimension in the drawing environment will have the same effect as changing the dimension in the modeling environment. Constraints will be re-evaluated and the geometry will update in the 3D model and drawing to reflect the new value.

485Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 496: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Placing DimensionsProcedureYou place dimensions on the drawing using the same tool you use in the modeling environment. When you place dimensions in the drawing, the dimensions are non-parametric and do not control geometry size as in the modeling environment. These dimensions are associative and will update to reflect correct values if changes occur on the geometry where they were applied.

You use the same dimension tool for all types of general dimensions, horizontal, vertical, diameter, radius, and aligned. Autodesk Inventor will place the correct type of dimension based upon the geometry selected.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the General Dimension tool.

Placing Dimensions - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview to placing different types of dimensions in the drawing environment.

1. To place a linear type dimension, on the Panel Bar, click the General Dimension and select a line or point being dimensioned.

2. Place the dimension or select another line or point to dimension to.

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut D

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings486

Page 497: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

3. Place the dimension on the sheet. When the dimension preview is dotted, you are currently at the default offset spacing for the dimension. Use this dotted preview to space your dimensions uniformly on the sheet.

4. To place a radial or diameter dimension, select a circular feature.

5. Position the dimension on the sheet.

6. To change the dimension type, before placing the dimension, right-click and select Dimension Type > Click Type of Dimension.

7. To dimension to an apparent intersection, select a linear element, then right-click

487Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 498: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

and select Intersection on the shortcut menu.

8. Select the next linear element to calculate the apparent intersection.

9. Select the endpoint or another element to end the dimension.

10. Place the dimension on the sheet. Extension lines to the apparent intersection are

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings488

Page 499: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

automatically added.

Editing Dimension TextWhen you place dimensions on the drawing, you can edit the text to add text to the dimension. Right-click on the dimension and click Text on the shortcut menu. This will present the Format Text dialog box.

The dimension value is indicated by <<>> characters and cannot be deleted. User placed text can be entered before or after the dimension value placeholder.

489Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 500: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing ViewPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will retrieve model dimensions into the drawing and use the General Dimension tool to add dimensions to different views.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Drawing Containing Dimensions

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings490

Page 501: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

General Annotation PlacementOverview

Overview

OverviewAnnotating a typical drawing generally consists of more than just adding dimensions to features. When documenting an assembly, you will typically have other annotation requirements such as parts lists and balloons.

In this lesson you learn to use additional annotation tools such as part lists and balloons when documenting your assembly.

ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to

• Use hole tables to annotate holes

• Annotate centerlines and centermarks using both manual and automatic methods

• Create note and leader based annotation to the drawing

• Add a parts list to the drawing to further annotate the assembly

• Add balloons to parts in the assembly drawing

Drawing Containing Typical Annotation Elements

491Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 502: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Annotating HolesProcedureAside from standard dimensions to annotate hole placement, you can also use Hole Tables to annotate the location and size of holes in a drawing view.

Three different versions of the Hole Table tool are available:

• Hole Table - Selection - Creates a Hole Table based upon the holes you select.

• Hole Table - View - Creates a Hole Table based upon all holes in the view.

• Hole Table - Selected Type - Creates a Hole Table of only those holes that are identical to the selected hole.

Although the use of each of these tools will result in a Hole Table, each version of the tool enables you to select the holes to include using a different method.

The image below represents an example of a drawing view containing a series of holes, accompanied by a typical hole table. When you place a hole table on your drawing, there are three main elements: (a) Hole Tags, which are placed next to each hole, (b) the Hole Table containing a row for each hole including the Hole Tag, Hole Position, and Size of each hole, and (c) the Origin Indicator which identifies the 0,0 location from which the hole locations are measured.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Hole Table tools.

Panel Bar

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings492

Page 503: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Hole Table - Selection Tool - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table using the Hole Table - Selection tool.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Hole Table - Selection tool and select the view containing the holes to include in the table.

2. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred.

3. Select the holes to include in the table. You can select the holes individually or by dragging a selection window around the holes to include.

4. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create. Then position the hole table

on the sheet.

493Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 504: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

5. The Hole Table and Tags appear on the drawing.

Hole Table - View Tool - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table with the Hole Table - View tool.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Hole Table - View tool and select the view containing the holes to include in the table.

2. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred.

3. Position the Hole Table on the sheet. It is not necessary to select the holes as all holes in the view will be included in the Hole Table.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings494

Page 505: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

4. The Hole Table and Tags appear on the sheet.

Hole Table - Selected Type - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table using the Hole Table - Selected Type tool.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Hole Table - Selected Type tool and select the view containing the holes to be included in the hole table.

2. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred.

3. Select one hole of each type you want to include in the hole table.

4. Right-click and select Create on the shortcut menu, then position the hole table on

495Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 506: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

the sheet.

5. Only the holes matching the type of hole selected are included in the hole table.

Editing Hole TablesAfter you create the hole table, you can edit the table in a number of different ways. Right-click on the hole table to reveal several different options to edit the appearance and information contained within the table.

To split the hole table, right-click on the row you would like to split and click Table > Split

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings496

Page 507: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The table is split into two and can be moved to a different location.

To add or remove holes from the table, right-click on the hole table and click Row > Add or Remove. Selecting Add will enable you to select another hole previously not included in the table and add it to the list. Selecting Remove will remove the hole in the selected row from the Hole Table.

497Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 508: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

You can control the visibility of hole table elements by right-clicking on the hole table and selecting Visibility >

• Origin - Controls the visibility of the origin indicator

• Tag - Controls the visibility of the selected tag.

• Hide All Tags - Hides all Tags

• Show All Tags - Shows all Tags

Right-click on the hole table and select Edit >

• Edit Tag - Enables you to edit the text used for the hole tag. The tag will change in the table and in the drawing view.

• Options - Presents the Edit Hole Table dialog box. See below for more information.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings498

Page 509: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The following options are available in the Edit Hole Table dialog box.

Title Position: Select a title position of Top, Bottom, or None.

Line Weight: Enter line weights and colors for the table. Select the inside or outside button to set properties for each.

Combine Notes: This option combines the notes cells for identical holes.

Numbering: This option replaces the alphanumeric tags with sequential hole numbers.

Rollup: This option combines the hole's table rows of the same type in the hole table. Only the first hole of each hole type is listed in the table.

Available Properties: Select the available properties to include in the list by selecting the property and clicking the Add button.

Delete: Select to delete a custom column. You cannot delete a default column

New Field: Select to create a custom column that you can use to add data to the hole table.

Selected Properties: Lists the currently selected properties appearing as columns in the table. Remove properties by selecting the property in the Selected Properties list and clicking Remove.

Move Up/Move Down: Adjust the order of the selected properties. The position in the list represents the order of columns in the table left to right.

Edit Hole Table Dialog Box

499Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 510: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Annotating Centerlines and Center MarksProcedureSeveral tools are available to annotate your drawing with centerlines and centermarks. You can place these annotations manually using the different tools available or place them automatically using the Automated Centerline tool.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access centerline and centermark tools.

Placing Centerlines and Center Marks AutomaticallyYou can place centerlines and centermarks automatically in a view by using the Automated Centerline tool. Right-click on a view and select Automated Centerlines from the shortcut menu.

The Centerline Settings dialog box enables you to set various criteria for the automated centerlines. Only the features matching the type(s) selected and meeting the threshold settings will receive automatic centerlines.

Panel Bar

Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and select Automated Centerlines

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings500

Page 511: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Apply To: Select the types of features you would like to automatically apply centerlines or centermarks

Projection: Select the view projection.

Threshold:

• Fillet: Set the minimum and maximum thresholds for fillets to receive automatic centerlines.

• Circular Edges: Set the minimum and maximum thresholds for circular edges to receive automatic centerlines.

• Precision: Set the precision to be used when analyzing the features against the threshold values.

Note: These settings can also be set in the Document Settings for the drawing. On the Tools menu, click Document Settings, then click the Drawing Tab and select the Automated Centerline Settings button. Setting these options in the Document Settings will store the settings in the drawing or template, alleviating the task of having to set these options each time.

Centerline Settings

501Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 512: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Creating Automatic Centerlines - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for applying centerlines automatically to a drawing view.

1. Right-click on the drawing view and click Automated Centerlines.

2. Adjust the feature type and threshold options and click OK.

3. The automatic centerlines are applied to features matching the selected type and threshold settings.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings502

Page 513: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using the Center Mark Tool - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for using the Center Mark tool.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Center Mark tool.2. Select a circular shape or feature.

3. The center mark is added to the drawing view.

4. Continue selecting circular features or right-click and select Done.

503Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 514: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using the Centerline Tool - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for using the Centerline tool to add centerlines to your drawing view.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Centerline tool and select an edge. The midpoint of the edge is automatically calculated.

2. Select the next edge for the centerline to pass through. Again the midpoint of the edge is automatically calculated.

3. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create on the shortcut menu. Then centerline is created passing through the midpoint of each selected edge.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings504

Page 515: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using the Centerline Bisector Tool - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for using the Centerline Bisector tool to add centerlines to your drawing views.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Centerline Bisector tool and select the first edge to bisect.

2. Select the second edge.

3. The centerline is calculated and drawn by bisecting the angle of the two edges selected.

505Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 516: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Using the Centered Pattern Tool - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for using the Centered Pattern tool to place centerlines on your drawing view.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Centered Pattern tool.2. Click the location representing the center of the pattern.

3. Select the features of the pattern. As soon as you select two features, the circular centerline will appear.

4. Continue selecting features as required, then right-click and select Create on the shortcut menu.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings506

Page 517: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Notes and LeadersProcedureYou use the Text and Leader Text tools to add notes and leaders to the drawing views. While you use the Text tool to place paragraph style text on the sheet, the Leader Text tool attaches a leader with text to the geometry within the view. The leaders are associative to the view and will move if the view moves.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Text and Leader Text tools.

Common to both the Text and Leader Text tools, use the Format Text dialog box to add text to your drawing.

The following options are available in the Format Text dialog box.

Style: Select a text style for the text or accept the default text style listed.

Text Format: Adjust the text formatting options such as justification, color, and width as required.

Component: Optional - Select the component to be used for parameters.

Panel Bar

Panel Bar

Format Text Dialog Box

507Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 518: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Source: Optional - Select Model Parameters or User Parameters.

Parameter: Optional - Select the parameter to use in the text.

Precision: Optional - Enter a precision for the parameter value.

d0 Button: Optional - Click to add the selected parameter to the text window.

Text Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.

Height: Enter or select a text height. If you enter a text height once, it will be available in the list for future text in this drawing.

Symbols Flyout: Select a special symbol to insert into the text.

Adding Text - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for adding text to the drawing.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Text tool and click and drag the rectangle text boundary.

2. In the Format Text dialog box, enter the text, adjust options as required and click OK.

Adding Leader Text - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for adding leader text to your drawing.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings508

Page 519: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Leader Text tool then select a start point and second point for the leader.

2. Right-click in the graphics window and click Continue on the shortcut menu.

3. Enter the text for the leader and click OK.

4. The leader text is attached to the drawing geometry.

509Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 520: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing TextRight-click on a text object to access text editing options.

Edit Text: Displays the Format Text dialog box.

Rotate 90 CW: Rotates the selected text 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 CCW: Rotates the selected text 90 degrees counter clockwise.

Editing Leader TextRight-click on a leader text object to access the text editing options.

Edit Leader Text: Displays the Format Text dialog box.

Edit Arrowhead: Displays the Change Arrowhead dialog box. In the drop-down list, select a different arrowhead.

Add Vertex / Leader: Select to add a vertex to the leader.

Delete Leader: Select this option to delete the leader.

Text Shortcut Menu

Leader Text Shortcut Menu Options

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings510

Page 521: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Parts ListsProcedureYou use Parts lists to annotate an assembly drawing by creating a table of parts included in the drawing. When you create a parts list you must first select a view. The parts list is based upon components in the selected view.

Access MethodsUsing the following method to access the Parts List tool.

The first time you create a parts list or balloon on the drawing you are presented with the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box. The options in this dialog box enable you to control which components appear in the Parts List and how they are numbered. The options you choose apply to all parts lists and balloons in the drawing. The options in this dialog box are only set once in the current drawing, unless all balloons and parts lists are deleted.

The following options are available and can be edited.

First-Level Components: This option numbers all first-level parts and subassemblies. You can display parts residing within a subassembly in the parts list and their numbers will be prefixed with the number of the item number of the subassembly. For example, if a subassembly in the parts list has an item number of 2, the parts residing within the parts list will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3.

Only Parts: This option numbers all first-level parts and parts within subassemblies, using standard item numbers. Subassemblies will not be listed or numbered in the parts list table.

Panel Bar

Parts List - Item Numbering Dialog Box

511Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 522: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

All: When selected, all parts in the assembly are numbered and listed. Not applicable or available when ballooning.

Items: Only available when the Only Parts level option is chosen, enter a range of parts to include in the parts list. Valid syntax is as follows: Not applicable or available when ballooning.

• Entering 1-4,6,8,10 - would list items 1-4 and items 6, 8, and 10 in the assembly.

Table Wrapping: The following section is not available when ballooning.

Number of Sections: Enter the number of sections to wrap the table. For example, if you enter 2, a 10 part list will be wrapped into two columns with 5 rows each.

Direction to Wrap Table: Select the direction to wrap the table, left or right.

Creating a Parts List - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for adding a parts list to your drawing.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Parts List tool and select a drawing view.

2. Adjust the options in the Parts-List - Item Numbering dialog box as required and click OK.

3. Left-click to position the parts list on the drawing.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings512

Page 523: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

4. The parts list appears on the drawing.

Editing Parts ListsAfter you create the parts list you can edit it to add/remove columns, merge rows, expand the display of subassemblies, and change other properties that control the display and content of the parts list.

To edit a parts list, right-click on the parts list and select Edit Parts List on the shortcut menu.

513Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 524: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The Edit Parts List dialog box enables you to modify several different properties of the parts list.

For more information on editing a parts list, refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help system.

To add a column to the parts list, click the Column Chooser button. This will display the Parts List Column Chooser dialog box. Select from the available properties and click the ADD button to add the property to the selected property list.

Click OK to exit each dialog box. The new column will appear in the parts list on the drawing.

Edit Parts List Dialog Box

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings514

Page 525: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Updating the Parts ListIf changes occur in the assembly model being referenced by the parts list, the parts list may not automatically update. If the parts list requires an update, it is indicated by a red lightning bolt next to the parts list in the drawing browser. Right-click on the parts list in the browser or graphics window and click Update on the shortcut menu.

Note: Updating the parts list will remove any information manually input into the parts list columns or cells that have not been frozen. To protect a cell from being overwritten, in the Edit Parts List dialog box, right-click on the cell and select Freeze Value on the shortcut menu.

515Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 526: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Placing BalloonsProcedureYou place balloons on assembly drawings to identify parts in the drawing and relate them to rows in the parts list. When you place a balloon on a part, the item number of the part will appear in the balloon. This item number is the same item number used in the parts list.

Balloons and parts lists are associative. If an item number in the parts list changes, the change will also be reflected in the balloon. This associativity is unidirectional only. If you override the item number in the balloon, the new value is not reflected in the parts list.

Access MethodsUse the following methods to access the Balloon and Balloon All tools.

The first time you create a parts list or balloon on the drawing you are presented with the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box. The options in this dialog box enable you to control which components appear in the Parts List and how they are numbered. The options you choose apply to all parts lists and balloons in the drawing. The options in this dialog box are only set once in the current drawing, unless all balloons and parts lists are deleted.

Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut B

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings516

Page 527: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The following options are available and can be edited.

First-Level Components: This option numbers all first-level parts and subassemblies. You can display parts residing within a subassembly in the parts list and their numbers will be prefixed with the number of the item number of the subassembly. For example, if a subassembly in the parts list has an item number of 2, the parts residing within the parts list will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3.

Only Parts: This option numbers all first-level parts and parts within subassemblies, using standard item numbers. Subassemblies will not be listed or numbered in the parts list table.

All: When selected, all parts in the assembly are numbered and listed. Not applicable or available when ballooning.

Items: Only available when the Only Parts level option is chosen, enter a range of parts to include in the parts list. Valid syntax is as follows: Not applicable or available when ballooning.

• Entering 1-4,6,8,10 - would list items 1-4 and items 6, 8, and 10 in the assembly.

Table Wrapping: The following section is not available when ballooning.

Number of Sections: Enter the number of sections to wrap the table. For example, if you enter 2, a 10 part list will be wrapped into two columns with 5 rows each.

Direction to Wrap Table: Select the direction to wrap the table, left or right.

Parts List - Item Numbering Dialog Box

517Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 528: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Placing Individual Balloons - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for placing individual balloons on your drawing.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Balloon tool and select a component in the drawing view. If this is the first balloon, and there is no parts list in the drawing, the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box will appear. Adjust the options as required and click OK.

2. Left-click to position the balloon then, right-click and select Continue on the shortcut menu.

3. Continue selecting component and placing balloons as required. Right-click in the graphics window and click Done when completed.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings518

Page 529: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Placing Balloons Using the Balloon All Tool - Process OverviewThe following steps represent an overview for using the Balloon All tool to balloon all components in the drawing view at once.

1. On the Panel Bar, click the Balloon All tool and select a drawing view. If there is no parts list in the drawing, the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box will appear. Adjust the options as required and click OK.

2. The balloons are automatically applied to the assembly components. Note: Balloons are only placed on the first occurrence of each part. You will also have to manually adjust the position of the balloons.

3. Click and drag on each balloon to reposition them as required.

519Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 530: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Editing BalloonsAfter you place the balloons on the sheet, you can edit them by right-clicking on the balloon and selecting Edit Balloon on the shortcut menu.

The Edit Balloon dialog box enables you to change the balloon type, as well as override the balloon value.

Note: If you override the balloon value, the new value is not reflected in the Parts List.

Balloon Type: Clear this option in order to select a different balloon type.

Symbols: If your drawing contains sketched symbols, you can select a sketched symbol to use for the balloon.

Balloon Value: Enter an override value in the override column. To use the override value, select the cell and click OK Click the Item cell to use the original item number in the balloon.

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings520

Page 531: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Exercise: General Annotation PlacementPrint Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you open the drawing file and use the tools learned in this lesson to annotate the drawing with centerlines, notes, leaders, parts lists and balloons.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: General Annotation Placement

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Drawing Containing Typical Annotation Elements

521Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 532: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Challenge Exercise: Introduction to DrawingsChallenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings

Print Exercise ReferenceIn this exercise, you will open a drawing and assume this drawing must meet your own company standards. You will edit the drawing by modifying or creating views, annotation, title blocks, drawing standards, dimensions styles and any other properties that would be required to complete the drawing to your company's standards.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Challenge Exercise Drawing

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings522

Page 533: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter SummarySummary

SummaryYou learned the following in this chapter:

• How to create and utilize drafting standards.

• How to create and use text styles and dimension styles.

• How to save text and dimension styles within a drawing template for later use.

• How to perform several functions related to managing drawing resources.

• How to create and edit base views and projected views.

• The options available in the Drawing View dialog box and how they effect the drawing views when you create them.

• How to create section views of parts and assemblies.

• How to create sketch geometry representing the section path and how to project isometric section views.

• How to magnify a specific area on your drawing by creating detail views. You also learned how to edit these views by changing the scale, area effected, and annotation associated with the detail view.

• How to create and edit auxiliary views.

• How to create and edit broken views on your sheet. You also learned how the available options in the Broken View dialog box can effect the view as it is created.

• How to create and edit Break Out views. You learned about the options available in the Break Out View dialog box and how to use these options to generate the required view.

• How to manage drawing views and sections by adjusting the alignment options as required.

• How to delete drawing views and copy and/or move views from one sheet to another in the current drawing.

• How to retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing.

• How to place additional reference dimensions on the sheet.

• How to apply different types of annotation objects to your drawing.

523Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 534: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings524

Page 535: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

In this chapterAfter completing this chapter, you will be able to...

• Create an assembly based on parameters defined in a 2D drawing.

• Create and assemble a number of parts based on parameters defined in 2D drawings.

• Create a presentation file that documents assembly instructions for a completed assembly.

• Create 2D documentation on a created assembly file.

Project Exercise

Review the goals and images of the drawings that follow. You can find guidelines to aid in completing the models for the drawing files using the Electronic Student Workbook.

To navigate to the exercises in the Electronic Student Workbook:

1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 8: Project Exercise

2. From the table of contents for Chapter 8: Project Exercise, click Overview

3. Review the goals for the exercise and use the navigation buttons in the Electronic Student Workbook to work through the exercises.

Page 536: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

5

Irrigation Control UnitOverview

Overview

OverviewIn this exercise you build the Irrigation Control Unit shown below. You will design each part of the Irrigation Control Unit (ICU) from scratch. After you model and detail each part, you create the assembly model for the ICU. During this process you assembly the parts you design, perform interference detection, calculate mass properties, and generate a drawing of the assembly showing part interaction, assembly instructions, and a bill of materials.

ObjectivesThis all-inclusive exercise requires more than the design of a single part. It incorporates the design and documentation of seven separate parts and an assembly of 14 components.

The approach outlined in this exercise is not the only way to approach the design of this Irrigation Control Unit. The approach shown here is intended to illustrate the use of Autodesk Inventor software for modeling, analyzing, and generating drawings of individual parts and the assembly of those parts.

Completed Irrigation Control Unit

Chapter 8: Project Exercise26

Page 537: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

The average time required to complete this exercise varies, but should take no longer than 6-8 hours. By completing this exercise you will explore the following Autodesk Inventor capabilities:

It is recommended that you create all of the parts contained in the Irrigation Control Unit by following the instructions in this exercise. You will gain the greatest benefit from this exercise by completing the design and documentation of each part as well as the assembly.

Design GoalsThe Irrigation Control Unit documented in this project controls the flow of a solution to two separate locations through the use of Right and Left Buttons. When a button is pressed, the solution from the main flow tube of the ICU flows through the exit tube. Solution flow is controlled by Valves located in the main cavities of the ICU. When the Valve is in the closed position, the solution from the main flow tube is restricted from flowing through the Valve and out the exit tubes. When the Valve is in the open position, the solution flows through the right, left, or both gates provided in the Valves and out the exit tubes.

The following is a list of goals or rules for the creation of the Irrigation Control Unit. This list describes your design criteria for the entire ICU exercise. Individual part design goals are provided as that portion of the exercise is presented to you.

• All parts must be fully parametric and have individual part drawings.

• All parts must be created in Metric (mm) units.

• Components (other than the rubber O-Rings) must not interfere.

• Parts must be designed to match the following drawings.

Using Feature Patterns Assembly Drawing Creation

Defining Tapped Holes Constraining Components

Using Hole Notes Using Projected Edges

Using Parameters and Linking Copying Sketches

Mirroring Parts Using To-Face Terminations

Using Construction Lines Shelling Parts

Part Drawing Creation Interference Detection

Presentation File Creation Tweaking and Applying Trails

Attaching Balloons to Components Generating a Bill of Materials

Generating Mass Properties Part Modification in an Assembly

527Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 538: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Irrigation Control Unit - Closed Position

Chapter 8: Project Exercise528

Page 539: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Irrigation Control Unit - Open Position

529Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 540: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Valve Housing

Chapter 8: Project Exercise530

Page 541: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Completed Irrigation Control Unit

531Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 542: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Valve

Chapter 8: Project Exercise532

Page 543: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Left and Right Buttons

533Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Page 544: Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials

Chapter 8: Project Exercise534